Wcdma Ran Planning and Optimization Features and Algorithms PDF

WCDMA UE Behaviors
in Idle Mode
www.huawei.com
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
Foreword
z
UE behaviors in idle mode include :
PLMN selection
System information reception
Cell selection and reselection
Location registration
Paging procedure
Access procedure
Page1
PLMN selection
Used to ensure that the PLMN selected by the UE properly provides services.
Cell selection and reselection

Used to ensure that the UE finds a suitable cell to camp on.
Location registration
Used for the network to trace the current status of the UE and to ensure that the UE is camped
on the network when the UE does not perform any operation for a long period.
System information reception

The network broadcasts the network information to a UE which camps on the cell to control the
behaviors of the UE.
Paging
Used for the network to send paging messages to a UE which is in idle mode, CELL_PCH
state, or URA_PCH state.
Access
From the view of access stratum, access is the procedure UE shift from idle mode to
connected mode.
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
2. System Information Reception
3. Cell Selection and Reselection
4. Location Registration
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
Page2
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
Page3
Cell Search
z
UE does not have UTRAN carrier information
In order to find a suitable cell to stay, UE will scan all the

frequencies in UTRAN. In each carrier, UE just need to find a
cell with best signal
UE has UTRAN carrier information
UE will try whether the original cell is suitable to stay. If not, UE

still need to scan all the frequencies about UTRAN in order to
find a suitable cell in PLMN
Page4
Typical scenario of first occasion is the first time a new UE is put into use.
The second occasion is very common.
Cell Search
Slot synchronization
Frame synchronization and

code-group identification
Primary Scrambling code

identification
Page5
Step 1: Slot synchronization

During the first step of the cell search procedure the UE uses the primary synchronisation code
(PSC) to acquire slot synchronisation to a cell.
Step 2: Frame synchronization and code-group identification

During the second step of the cell search procedure, the UE uses the secondary
synchronisation code (SSC) to find frame synchronisation and identify the code group of the
cell found in the first step.
Step 3: Primary Scrambling code identification:

During the last step of the cell search procedure, the UE determines the exact primary
scrambling code used by the found cell. The primary scrambling code is typically identified
through symbol-by-symbol correlation over the CPICH with all codes within the code group
identified in the second step.
If the UE has received information about which scrambling codes to search for, steps 2 and 3
above can be simplified.
PLMN Selection
z
UE shall maintain a list of allowed PLMN types. In the

PLMN list, the UE arranges available PLMNs by priorities.
When selecting a PLMN, it searches the PLMNs from the
high priority to the low.
The UE selects a PLMN from HPLMNs or VPLMNs.
Page6
UE can get the system information from PCCPCH, and the PLMN information is transmitted in
MIB of PCCPCH
After getting the MIB, UE can judge weather the current PLMN is the right one. If so, UE will
get the SIB scheduling information from the MIB; if not, UE will search another carrier, do this
procedure again
PLMN Selection (Cont.)

z
PLMN Selection in HPLMNs
Automatic PLMN Selection Mode
The UE selects an available and suitable PLMN from the whole

band according to the priority order
Manual PLMN Selection Mode
The order of manual selection is the same as that of automatic

selection.
Page7
The priority order for automatic PLMN selection mode

Order
PLMN type
Remark
HPLMNs
Home PLMNs
PLMNs contained in the "User Controlled PLMN

Selector with Access Technology" data field in the
SIM excluding the previously selected PLMN
The PLMNs are arranged in

priority order
PLMNs contained in the "Operator Controlled

PLMN Selector with Access Technology" data field
in the SIM excluding the previously selected PLMN

priority order
Other PLMN/access technology combinations with

the high quality of received signals excluding the
previously selected PLMN

random order
Other PLMN/access technology combinations

excluding the previously selected PLMN

descending order of signal
quality.
Previously selected PLMN
The PLMN selected by the

UE before automatic PLMN
selection
PLMN Selection (Cont.)

z
PLMN Selection in VPLMNs
If a UE is in a VPLMN, it scans the user controlled PLMN

selector field or the operator controlled PLMN selector field
in the PLMN list to find the HPLMN or the PLMN with higher
priority according to the requirement of the automatic PLMN
selection mode.
Page8
A value of T minutes may be stored in the SIM. T is either in the range from 6 minutes to 8
hours in 6-minute steps or it indicates that no periodic attempts shall be made. If no value is
stored in the SIM, a default value of 60 minutes is used.
After the UE is switched on, a period of at least 2 minutes and at most T minutes shall elapse
before the first attempt is made.
The UE shall make an attempt if the UE is on the VPLMN at time T after the last attempt.
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
Page9
10
Structure of System Information

z
System information is organized as a tree, including:
MIB (Master Information Block )
SB (Scheduling Block )
SIB (System Information Block )
System information is used for the network to broadcast network information to UEs camping
on a cell so as to control the behavior of UEs.
MIB
Scheduling Block (SB) gives reference and scheduling information to other SIBs. The
scheduling information of a SIB may be included in only one of MIB and SB.
SIB
When selecting a new cell, the UE reads the MIB. The UE may locate the MIB by
predefined scheduling information. The IEs in the MIB includes MIB value tag, PLMN
type, PLMN identity, reference and scheduling information for a number of SIBs in a
cell or one or two SBs in a cell.
SB
Page10
System Information Block (SIB) contains actual system information. It consists of

system information elements (IEs) with the same purpose.
Scheduling information for a system information block may only be included in either the
master information block or one of the scheduling blocks.
11
System Information
z
z
z
SIB1: Contains the system information for NAS and the

timer/counter for UE
SIB2: Contains the URA information
SIB3: Contains the parameters for cell selection and cell reselection
SIB5: Contains parameters for the common physical channels of
the cell
SIB7: Contains the uplink interference level and the refreshing
timer for SIB7
SIB11: Contains measurement controlling information
SIB4: Contains parameters for cell selection and cell re-selection while UE is in connected
mode
SIB6: Contains parameters for the common physical channels of the cell while UE is in
connected mode
SIB8: Contains the CPCH static information
SIB9: Contains the CPCH dynamic information
Page11
SIB10: Contains information to be used by UEs having their DCH controlled by a DRAC
procedure. Used in FDD mode only. To be used in CELL_DCH state only. Changes so often,
its decoding is controlled by a timer
SIB12: Contains measurement controlling information in connecting mode
SIB13: Contains ANSI-41 system information
SIB14: Contains the information in TDD mode
SIB15: Contains the position service information
SIB16: Contains the needed pre-configuration information for handover from other RAT to
UTRAN
SIB17: Contains the configuration information for TDD
SIB18: Contains the PLMN identities of the neighboring cells
To be used in shared networks to help with the cell reselection process
12
Reception of System Information

z
The UE shall read system information broadcast on a BCH

transport channel when the UE is in idle mode or in
connected mode, that is, in CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH, or
URA_PCH state.
Page12
The UE may use the scheduling information in MIB and SB to locate each SIB to be acquired.
If the UE receives a SIB in a position according to the scheduling information and consider the
content valid, it will read and store it.
13
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
Page13
14
Cell Selection
z
When the PLMN is selected and the UE is in idle mode, the

UE starts to select a cell to camp on and to obtain services.
There are four states involved in cell selection:
Camped normally
Any cell selection
Camped on any cell
Connected mode
Page14
Camped normally: The cell that UE camps on is called the suitable cell. In this state, the UE
obtains normal service.
Any cell selection: In this state, the UE shall attempt to find an acceptable cell of an any PLMN
to camp on, trying all RATs that are supported by the UE and searching first for a high quality
cell
Camped on any cell: The cell that UE camps on is called the acceptable cell. In this state the
UE obtains limited service. The UE shall regularly attempt to find a suitable cell of the selected
PLMN, trying all RATs that are supported by the UE.
Connected mode: When returning to idle mode, the UE shall use the procedure Cell selection
when leaving connected mode in order to find a suitable cell to camp on and enter state
Camped normally. If no suitable cell is found in cell reselection evaluation process, the UE
enters the state Any cell selection.
15
Cell Selection (Cont.)

z
Two types of cell selection:
Initial cell selection
If no cell information is stored for the PLMN, the UE starts this

procedure.
Stored information cell selection
If cell information is stored for the PLMN, the UE starts this

procedure.
Page15
Initial cell selection: If no cell information is stored for the PLMN, the UE starts the initial cell
selection. For this procedure, the UE need not know in advance which Radio Frequency (RF)
channels are UTRA bearers. The UE scans all RF channels in the UTRA band according to its
capabilities to find a suitable cell of the selected PLMN. On each carrier, the UE need only
search for the strongest cell. Once a suitable cell is found, this cell shall be selected.
Stored information cell selection: For this procedure, the UE need know the central frequency
information and other optional cell parameters that are obtained from the measurement control
information received before, such as scrambling codes. After this procedure is started, the UE
selects a suitable cell if it finds one. Otherwise, the "Initial cell selection" procedure is triggered.
16
Cell Selection Criteria

z
Criterion S is used by the UE to judge whether the cell is

suitable to camped on.
Criterion S : Srxlev > 0 & Squal > 0, where:
S qual = Qqualmeas Qqual min
S rxlev = Qrxlevmeas Qrxlev min Pcompensation
Page16
If the pilot strength and quality of one cell meet S criteria, UE will stay in this cell and get other
system information. Then, UE will initiate a location update registration process.
If the cell doesnt satisfy S criteria, UE will get adjacent cells information from SIB11. Then, UE
will judge weather these cells satisfy S criteria. If the adjacent cell is suitable, UE will stay in
the adjacent cell.
If no cell satisfies S criteria, UE will take the area as dead zone and continue the PLMN
selection and reselection procedure.
Parameters
Explanation
Squal
Cell quality value (dB)
Srxlev
Cell RX level value (dBm)
Qqualmeas
Measured cell quality value. The quality of the received signal expressed in
CPICH Ec/N0 (dB) for current cell
Qrxlevmeas
Measured cell RX level value. This is received signal, CPICH RSCP for
current cells (dBm)
Qqualmin
Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB)
Qrxlevmin
Minimum required RX level in the cell (dBm)
Pcompensation
UE_TXPWR_
MAX_RACH
P_MAX
MaxUE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH-P_MAX0, dBm
Maximum TX power level an UE may use when accessing the cell on
RACH (read in system information) (dBm)
Maximum RF output power of the UE (dBm)
17
Parameters of S Criterion
z
QUALMEAS
Parameter name: Cell Se-reselection quality measure
Recommended value: CPICH_ECNO
QQUALMIN
Parameter name: Min quality level
Recommended value: -18, namely -18dB
QUALMEAS
Parameter name: Cell Sel-reselection quality measure
Value range: CPICH_ECNO(CPICH Ec/N0),CPICH_RSCP(CPICH RSCP)
Physical unit: None.
Page17
Content: Cell selection and reselection quality measure, may be set to CPICH Ec/N0
or CPICH RSCP.
Recommended value: CPICH_ECNO.
QQUALMIN
Parameter name: Min quality level
Value range: -24~0
Physical value range: -24~0; step: 1
Physical unit: dB
Content: The minimum required quality level corresponding to CPICH Ec/No. The UE
can camp on the cell only when the measured CPICH Ec/No is greater than the value
of this parameter.
Recommended value: -18
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LST
CELLSELRESEL, and modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
18
Parameters of S Criterion
z
QRXLEVMIN
Parameter name: Min Rx level
Recommended value: -58, namely -115dBm
MAXALLOWEDULTXPOWER
Parameter name: Max allowed UE UL TX power
Recommended value: 21, namely 21dBm
QRXLEVMIN
Parameter name: Min Rx level
Value range: -58~-13.
Physical value range: -115~-25; step: 2 (-58:-115; -57:-113; ..., -13:-25 ).
Physical unit: dBm.
Page18
Content: The minimum required RX level corresponding to CPICH RSCP. The UE can
camp on the cell only when the measured CPICH RSCP is greater than the value of
this parameter.
Recommended value: -58.
MAXALLOWEDULTXPOWER
Value range: -50~33
Physical value range: -50~33; step: 1
Physical unit: dBm
Content: The maximum allowed uplink transmit power of a UE in the cell, which is
related to the network planning. Content: Allowed maximum power transmitted on
RACH in the cell. It is related to network planning.
19
Cell Reselection
z
After selecting a cell and camping on it, the UE periodically

searches for a better cell according to the cell reselection
criteria. If finding such a cell, the UE selects this cell to
camp on.
Page19
UE should monitor the quality of current cell and neighbor cells in order to camp on the better
cell to initiate service. The better cell is the most suitable one for the UE to camp on and obtain
services. The QoS of this cell is not necessarily more satisfying.
20
Measurement Start Criteria (Cont.)

z
Intra-frequency measurement
Squal Sintrasearch
Qqualmeas Qqualmin Sintrasearch
Qqualmeas Qqualmin + Sintrasearch
Page20
Parameters of the measurement start criteria
Name
Description
Squal
Qqualmin
Minimum required quality level in the cell (dB) .
Sintrasearch
Measurement threshold for UE to trigger intra-frequency cell reselection,

compared with Squal.
Sintersearch
Measurement threshold for UE to trigger inter-frequency cell reselection,

SsearchRATm
Measurement threshold for UE to trigger inter-RAT cell reselection,

21

z
Inter-frequency measurement
Squal Sintersearch
Qqualmeas Qqualmin Sintersearch
Qqualmeas Qqualmin + Sintersearch
Page21
Name
Description
Squal
Qqualmin
Sintrasearch

Sintersearch

SsearchRATm

22

z
Inter-RAT measurement
Squal SsearchRATm
Qqualmeas Qqualmin SsearchRATm
Qqualmeas Qqualmin + SsearchRATm
Page22
Name
Description
Squal
Qqualmin
Sintrasearch

Sintersearch

SsearchRATm

23
Parameters of Measurement Start Criteria

z
IDLESINTRASEARCH
Parameter name: Intra-freq cell reselection threshold for idle

mode
Recommended value: None
CONNSINTRASEARCH
Parameter name: Intra-freq cell reselection threshold for

connected mode
IDLESINTRASEARCH
Parameter name: Intra-freq cell reselection threshold for idle mode
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical value range: -32~20; step: 2.
Physical unit: dB.
Page23
Content: A threshold for intra-frequency cell reselection in idle mode. When the quality
(CPICH Ec/No measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold plus
the [Qqualmin] of the cell, the intra-frequency cell reselection procedure will be started.
Recommended value: None.
CONNSINTRASEARCH
Parameter name: Intra-freq cell reselection threshold for connected mode
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical unit: dB
Content: A threshold for intra-frequency cell reselection in connect mode. When the
quality (CPICH Ec/No measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold
plus the [Qqualmin] of the cell, the intra-frequency cell reselection procedure will be
started.
24

z
IDLESINTERSEARCH
Parameter name: Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for idle

mode
CONNSINTERSEARCH
Parameter name: Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for

connected mode
IDLESINTERSEARCH
Parameter name: Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for idle mode
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical unit: dB.
Page24
Content: A threshold for inter-frequency cell reselection in idle mode. When the quality
(CPICH Ec/No measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold plus
the [Qqualmin] of the cell, the inter-frequency cell reselection procedure will be started.
CONNSINTERSEARCH
Parameter name: Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for connected mode
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical unit: dB
Content: A threshold for inter-frequency cell reselection in connect mode. When the
quality (CPICH Ec/No measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold
plus the [Qqualmin] of the cell, the inter-frequency cell reselection procedure will be
started.
25

z
SSEARCHRAT
Parameter name: Inter-RAT cell reselection threshold
Page25
SSEARCHRAT
Parameter name: Inter-RAT cell reselection threshold
Value range: {{-16~10},{127}} .
Physical unit: dB.
Content: A threshold for inter-RAT cell reselection. When the quality (CPICH Ec/No
measured by UE) of the serving cell is lower than this threshold plus the [Qqualmin] of
the cell, the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure will be started.
26
Measurement Start Criteria Description
Page26
The intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT measurement criteria are as shown in the
figure.
Usually, Sintrasearch > Sintersearch > SsearchRATm
27
Cell Reselection Criteria

z
Criterion R is used for intra-frequency, inter-frequency cells

and inter-RAT cell reselection.
The cell-ranking criterion R is defined by :
Rs = Qmeas , s + Qhysts
Rn = Qmeas ,n Qoffset s ,n
z
z
z
z
Page27
The cells are ranked according to R criteria specified above ,deriving Qmeas,n and Qmeas,s and
calculating R value.
In Rs, s means serving cell. In Rn, n means neighbor cell.
The offset Qoffset1s,n is used for Qoffsets,n to calculate Rn. The hysteresis Qhyst1s is used
for Qhysts to calculate Rs.
If a TDD or GSM cell is ranked as the best cell, the UE shall reselect that TDD or GSM cell.
If an FDD cell is ranked as the best cell and the quality measure for cell selection and
reselection is set to CPICH RSCP, the UE shall reselect that FDD cell.
If an FDD cell is ranked as the best cell and the quality measure for cell selection and
reselection is set to CPICH Ec/N0, the UE shall perform a second ranking of the FDD cells
according to the R criteria specified above.
In this case, however, the UE uses the measurement quantity CPICH Ec/N0 for deriving the
Qmeas,n and Qmeas,s and then calculating the R values of the FDD cells. The offset
Qoffset2s,n is used for Qoffsets,n to calculate Rn, the hysteresis Qhyst2s is used for Qhysts to
calculate Rs.
28
Hysteresis and Time Interval

Quality
Qhyst,s
Qmeas,n
Rn
Rs
Qoffsets,n
Qmeas,s
Treselection
Time
Page28
In all the previous cases, the UE can reselect a new cell only when the following conditions are
met:
The new cell is better ranked than the serving cell during a time interval Treselection.
More than one second has elapsed since the UE camped on the current serving cell.
29
Parameters of R Criteria
z
IDLEQHYST1S
Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for idle mode
Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB
CONNQHYST1S
Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for connect mode
Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB
IDLEQHYST1S
Value range: 0~20.
Physical value range: 0~40; step: 2.
Physical unit: dB.
Page29
Content: The hysteresis value in idle mode for serving FDD cells in case the quality
measurement for cell selection and reselection is set to CPICH RSCP. It is related to
the slow fading feature of the area where the cell is located. The greater the slow
fading variance is, the greater this parameter.
Recommended value: 2.
CONNQHYST1S
Parameter name: Hysteresis 1 for connected mode
Value range: 0~20.
Physical unit: dB.
Content: The hysteresis value in connect mode for serving FDD cells in case the
quality measurement for cell selection and reselection is set to CPICH RSCP. It is
related to the slow fading feature of the area where the cell is located. The greater the
slow fading variance is, the greater this parameter.
30
Parameters of R Criteria (Cont.)

z
IDLEQHYST2S
Recommended value: Qhyst1s for idle mode
CONNQHYST2S
Recommended value: Qhyst1s for connected mode.
IDLEQHYST2S
Value range: {{0~20},{255}} .
Physical unit: dB.
Page30
Content: The hysteresis value in idle mode for serving FDD cells in case the quality
measurement for cell selection and reselection is set to CPICH Ec/No. It is related to the slow
fading feature of the area where the cell is located. The greater the slow fading variance is, the
greater this parameter. It is optional. If it is not configured, [Hysteresis 1] will be adopted as the
value.
Recommended value: Qhyst1s for idle mode .
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LST CELLSELRESEL, and
modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
CONNQHYST2S
Value range: {{0~20},{255}} .
Physical unit: dB.
Content: The hysteresis value in connect mode for serving FDD cells in case the quality
measurement for cell selection and reselection is set to CPICH RSCP. It is related to the slow
fading feature of the area where the cell is located. The greater the slow fading variance is, the
greater this parameter.
Recommended value: Qhyst1s for connected mode. .
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LST CELLSELRESEL, and
modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
31

z
TRESELECTIONS
Parameter name: Reselection delay time
Recommended value: 1, namely 1s.
Page31
TRESELECTIONS
Parameter name: Reselection delay time
Value range: 0~31 .
Physical unit: s.
Content: If the signal quality of a neighboring cell is better than the serving cell during
the specified time of this parameter, the UE will reselect the neighboring cell. It is used
to avoid ping-pong reselection between different cells. Note: The value 0 corresponds
to the default value defined in the protocol.
32

z
IDLEQOFFSET1SN
Parameter name: IdleQoffset1sn
Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB.
CONNQOFFSET1SN
Parameter name: ConnQoffset1sn
IDLEQOFFSET1SN
Offset of cell CPICH RSCP measurement value in cell selection or reselection when the UE is in
idle mode
Value range: -50 to +50 .
Physical value range: -50 to +50; step: 1.
Physical unit: dB.
Page32
Content: This parameter is used for moving the border of a cell. The larger the value of this
parameter, the lower the probability of neighboring cell selection.
Set this parameter through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL / ADD INTERFREQNCELL, query it
through LST INTRAFREQNCELL / LST INTERFREQNCELL, and modify it through MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL / MOD INTERFREQNCELL.
CONNQOFFSET1SN
connected mode
Physical value range: -50 to +50 ; step: 1.
Physical unit: dB.
33

z
IDLEQOFFSET2SN
CONNQOFFSET2SN
IDLEQOFFSET2SN
Offset of cell CPICH Ec/No measurement value in cell selection or reselection when the UE is in
idle mode
Physical value range: -50 to +50; step: 1.
Physical unit: dB.
Page33
CONNQOFFSET2SN
connected mode
Physical value range: -50 to +50 ; step: 1.
Physical unit: dB.
34
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
Page34
35
Location Registration
z
The location registration includes:
Location update (for non-GPRS)
Route update (for GPRS)
Page35
The location registration is used for the PLMN to trace the current status of the UE and to
ensure that the UE is connected with the network when the UE does not perform any operation
for a long period.
36
Periodic Location Registration

z
Periodic location registration is controlled by a Periodic

Location Update timer (T3212) or a Periodic Routing Area
Update timer (T3312)
Page36
Periodic location registration may be used to periodically notify the network of the availability of
the UE.
T3212 is for non-GPRS operation
T3312 is for GPRS operation
37
Parameters of Location Registration

z
T3212
Parameter name: Periodical location update timer [6min]
Recommended value: 10, namely 60min
ATT
Parameter name: Attach/detach indication
Recommended value: ALLOWED
T3212
Parameter name: Periodical location update timer [6min]
Value range: 0~255.
Physical unit: 6 min.
Page37
Content: This parameter indicates the time length of the periodical location update.
Periodical location update is implemented by MS through the location update
procedure. 0: The periodical update procedure is not used. This parameter is valid only
when [CN domain ID] is set as CS_DOMAIN.
Set this parameter through ADD CNDOMAIN, query it through LST CNDOMAIN,
modify it through MOD CNDOMAIN.
ATT
Parameter name: Attach/detach indication
Value range: NOT_ALLOWED, ALLOWED .
Content: NOT_ALLOWED indicates that MS cannot apply the IMSI attach/detach

procedure. ALLOWED indicates that MS can apply the IMSI attach/detach procedure.
This parameter is valid only when [CN domain ID] is set as CS_DOMAIN.
Recommended value: ALLOWED.
Set this parameter through ADD CNDOMAIN, query it through LST CNDOMAIN,
38
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
Page38
39
Paging Initiation
z
CN initiated paging
z
Establish a signaling connection
UTRAN initiated paging

z
Trigger the cell update procedure
Trigger reading of updated system information
Page39
For CN originated paging:
In order to request UTRAN connect to UE, CN initiates the paging procedure,

transmits paging message to the UTRAN through Iu interface, and UTRAN transmits
the paging message from CN to UE through the paging procedure on Uu interface,
which will make the UE initiate a signaling connection setup process with the CN.
For UTRAN originated paging:
When the cell system message is updated: When system messages change, the
UTRAN will trigger paging process in order to inform UE in the idle, CELL_PCH or
URA_PCH state to carry out the system message update, so that the UE can read the
updated system message.
UE state transition: In order to trigger UE in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state to

carry out state transition (for example, transition to the CELL_FACH state), the UTRAN
will perform a paging process. Meanwhile, the UE will initiate a cell update or URA
update process, as a reply to the paging.
40
Paging Type 1
z
If UE is in CELL_PCH,URA_PCH or IDLE statethe paging

message will be transmitted on PCCH with paging type 1
CN
RNC1
RNC2
NODEB1.1
NODEB2.1
UE
PAGING
RANAP
RANAP
RANAP
PAGING
RANAP
PCCH: PAGING TYPE 1
PCCH: PAGING TYPE 1
Paging type 1:
The message is transmitted in one LA or RA according to LAI or RAI.
Page40
After calculating the paging time, the paging message will be transmitted at that time
If UE is in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, the UTRAN transmits the paging
information in PAGING TYPE 1 message to UE. After received paging message, UE
performs a cell update procedure to transit state to CELL_FACH.
As shown in the above figure, the CN initiates paging in a location area (LA), which is covered
by two RNCs. After receiving a paging message, the RNC searches all the cells corresponding
to the LAI, and then calculates the paging time, at which it will send the PAGING TYPE 1
message to these cells through the PCCH.
41
Paging Type 2
z
If UE is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH statethe paging

message will be transmitted on DCCH with paging type 2
CN
SRNC
UE
PAGING
RANAP
RANAP
DCCH: PAGING TYPE 2

RRC
Page41
Paging type 2:
RRC
If UE is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH statethe paging message will be transmitted

on DCCH with paging type 2
The message will be only transmitted in a cell
As shown in the above figure, if the UE is in the CELL_-DCH or CELL_FACH state, the
UTRAN will immediately transmit PAGING TYPE 2 message to the paged UE on DCCH
channel.
42
Typical Call Flow of UE

N SS
U E AS
U E N AS
paging
R R _P A IN G _IN D
M SC
paging
RANAP
RANAP
R R _E S T_R E Q (P A G IN G R E S P O N S E )
R R C setup process
IN ITIA L_D IR E C T_TR A N S FE R
A U TH E N TIC A TIO N
REQUEST
AU TH E N TIC A TIO N
R E SP O N S E
(P A G IN G R E S P O N S E )
R R _S E C U R ITY _C O N TR O L_R E Q
(IK C K )
S ecu rity m o de co ntrol

S E TU P
C A LL C O N FIR M
R A B se tu p pro cess
A LE R T
CONNECT
C O N N E C T A C K N O W LE D G E
Page42
Many problems will cause the target UE cannot receive the paging message properly
Power setting of paging channel is unreasonable.
Unreasonable paging strategies will result in paging channel congestion, which can
cause paging message loss.
Paging parameter is unreasonable
Equipment fault
43
DRX Procedure
z
UE receives the paging indicator on PICH periodically, that

is the Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
The value for the DRX paging cycle length is determined as

follows: :
DRX Cycle Length (2^K)PBP frames
Page43
In idle mode, the UE can monitor the paging in two modes: one is to decode SCCPCH directly
every 10ms, the other is to decode the PICH periodically. The second one is the DRX, which is
Discontinuous Reception Mechanism.
The paging period formula:
DRX Cycle Length (2^K)*PBP frames

K is the CN domain specific DRX cycle length coefficient, which is broadcasted in
SIB1. The typical value is 6.
PBP is paging block period, which is 1 for FDD mode
The paging period should be 640ms if K is 6
44
DRX Procedure (Cont.)

z
Through DRX, UE only listens to PICH at certain predefined

time. And UE will read the paging information on SCCPCH if
the paging indicator is 1.
The value of the Paging Occasion is determined as follows:

Paging Occasion (CELL SFN) =
{(IMSI mod M) mod (DRX cycle length div PBP)} * PBP
+ n * DRX cycle length + Frame Offset
Page44
Paging SFN formula:
Paging Occasion (CELL SFN) = {(IMSI mod M) mod (DRX cycle length div PBP)}
*PBP + n *DRX cycle length + Frame Offset
n =0, 1, 2and the requirement is the calculated CELL SFN must be below its
maximum value 4096
Frame Offset is 0 for FDD mode
M is the number of SCCPCH which carries PCH, and the typical value is 1
The formula cloud be simplified as: SFN = IMSI mod (2^K) + n * (2^K)
45

z
UE must calculate q to know which PI to monitor in one

frame of PICH
The q value is achieved by the following formula :
Np
q = PI + ((18 (SFN + SFN / 8 + SFN / 64 + SFN / 512)) mod144)

mod Np
144
Where, PI = (IMSI div 8192) mod NP
z
z
Page45
SFN is the paging occasion of the UE

As shown in the followed figure, the UE needs to monitor the frames (paging occasions)
indicated by the red dots, and then decodes the qth PI of this frame.
One DRX cycle
2^K-1

4095
PI PI
0 1

P I
q
PI
NP-1
46

z
Time offset between PICH and S-CCPCH
PICH frame containing paging indicator

Associated S-CCPCH frame
PICH
Page46
The timing relationship between PICH and S-CCPCH is defined by the above figure, and the
interval is 3 slots duration (2ms, 7680 chips).
47
Parameters of DRX
z
DRXCYCLELENCOEF
Parameter name: DRX cycle length coefficient
Recommended value: 6
PICHMODE
Parameter name: PICH mode
Recommended value: V36.
DRXCYCLELENCOEF
Parameter name: DRX cycle length coefficient
Page47
Value range: 6~9 .

Content: This parameter is broadcasted on SIB1. This parameter is used when a UE is
in idle mode.
Set this parameter through ADD CNDOMAIN, query it through LST CNDOMAIN, and
PICHMODE
Parameter name: PICH mode
Value range: V18, V36, V72, V144 .
Physical value range: 18, 36, 72, 144 .
Content: Indicating the number of PIs contained in each frame on the PICH.
Recommended value: V36 .
Set this parameter through ADD PICH, query it through LST PICH.
48
Parameters of DRX
z
MACCPAGEREPEAT
Parameter name: Number of page re-TX
Page48
MACCPAGEREPEAT
Parameter name: Number of page re-TX
Number of retransmissions of paging message
Value range: 0~2 .
Content: If the number of retransmissions of paging message exceeds this parameter

value, retransmissions stop.
Set this parameter through SET WFMRCFGDATA, query it through LST
WFMRCFGDATA.
49
Contents
1. PLMN Selection
5. Paging Procedure
6. Access Procedure
Page49
50
Two Working Mode of UE

z
Idle mode
After turning on, UE will stay in idle mode
Connected mode
UE will switch to connected mode which could be CELL_FACH

state or CELL_DCH state from the idle mode
After releasing RRC connection, UE will switch to the idle

mode from the connected mode
z
z
Page50
The most important difference between idle mode and connected mode is whether UE has
RRC connection with UTRAN or not.
In idle mode, UE will be identified by IMSI, TMSI or PTMSI and so on.
In connected mode, UE will be identified by URNTI (UTRAN Radio Network Temporary
Identity), which is the ID of one RRC connection.
51
Random Access Procedure

z
Definition
Random access procedure is initiated by UE in order to get

service from the system. Meanwhile, the access channels are
allocated to the UE by system
Page51
This process may happen in the following scenarios:
Attach and detach
LA update and RA update
Signaling connection for services
52
Random Access Channel

z
Definition
AICH access
slots
SFN mod 2 = 0
p-a
#0
PRACH
access slots
#0
#1
#2
#1
#3
#2
#4
#3
#5
#4
#6
SFN mod 2 = 1
#5
#6
#7
#8
Access slot set 1
#7
#9
#8
#9
#10
#11
z
z
#11
#12
#13
#12
#13
#14
#14
Access slot set 2
10 ms
#10
10 ms
Page52
UE will transmit the preamble at the access time slot

Each 20ms access frame is composed of two 10ms radio frames, which is divided into 15
access time slot, and 5120 chips for each slot
The PRACH access slots, AICH access slots and their time offset are showed in the above
figure
53
RACH Sub-Channels
z
The access slots of different RACH sub-channels are illustrated by

the following table
SFN
mod 8
Random access sub-channels number

0
12
13
14
10
5
6
10
11
10
11
11 12 13 14
8
0
10 11 12 13
14
10 11 12 13 14
7
Page53
A RACH sub-channel defines a sub-set of the total set of uplink access slots. There are a total
of 12 RACH sub-channels.
54
Access Service Class

z
The PRACH resources can be classified into several ASCs,

so as to provide RACH applications with different priorities.
Page54
For Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode, the PRACH resources include access timeslots
and preamble signatures, which can be classified into several ASCs, so as to provide RACH
applications with different priorities.
The ASCs range from 0 to 7, and the quantity of ASCs is 8. "0" indicates the highest priority
and "7" indicates the lowest priority.
The system will assign random access sub-channels and signatures according to the ASC
(Access Service Class ) of UE.
Set ASC of PRACH through ADD PRACHASC, modify it through MOD PRACHASC, and
remove it through RMV PRACHASC.
55
Access Control
z
Access Control is used by network operators to prevent

overload of radio access channels under critical conditions.
Access class 0~Access Class 9
Access class 11~Access Class 15
Access class 10
Page55
The access class number is stored in the SIM/USIM.
Access class 0~9 are allocated to all the users. And the 10 classes show the same priority.
Access class 11~15 are allocated to specific high priority users as follows. (The enumeration is
not meant as a priority sequence):
Access class 15: PLMN staff
Access class 14: users subscribing to emergency services
Access class 13: public organizations
Access class 12: users subscribing to security services
Access class 11: users responsible for PLMN management
Access Class 10 indicates whether or not network access for Emergency Calls is allowed for
UEs with access classes 0 to 9 or without an IMSI. For UEs with access classes 11 to 15,
Emergency Calls are not allowed if both "Access class 10" and the relevant Access Class (11
to 15) are barred. Otherwise, Emergency Calls are allowed.
56
Mapping between AC and ASC

z
The AC-ASC mapping information is optional and used for

the System Information Block 5 (SIB5) only.
Page56
Set the mapping between AC and ASC through ADD PRACHACTOASCMAP, modify it
through MOD PRACHACTOASCMAP, and remove it through RMV PRACHACTOASCMAP.
57
Random Access Procedure

START
Choose a RACH sub channel from

available ones
Get available signatures
Set Preamble Retrans Max
Set Preamble_Initial_Power
Send a preamble
No AI
Choose a access slot again
Check the corresponding AI

Get positive AI
Choose a signature and

increase preamble transmit power
The counter of preamble retransmit

Subtract-1, Commanded preamble
power increased by Power Ramp Step
Counter> 0 & Preamble

power-maximum allowed power
<6 dB
Get negative AI
Increase message part power by

p-m based on preamble power
Send the corresponding

message part
Set physical status to be RACH

message transmitted
Set physical status to be Nack

on AICH received
N
Set physical status to be Nack
on AICH received
Report the physical status to MAC
END
58
Physical random access procedure
1. Derive the available uplink access slots, in the next full access slot set, for the set of
available RACH sub-channels within the given ASC. Randomly select one access slot
among the ones previously determined. If there is no access slot available in the
selected set, randomly select one uplink access slot corresponding to the set of
available RACH sub-channels within the given ASC from the next access slot set. The
random function shall be such that each of the allowed selections is chosen with equal
probability
2. Randomly select a signature from the set of available signatures within the given
ASC
3. Set the Preamble Retransmission Counter to Preamble_ Retrans_ Max
4. Set the parameter Commanded Preamble Power to Preamble_Initial_Power
5. Transmit a preamble using the selected uplink access slot, signature, and preamble
transmission power
6. If no positive or negative acquisition indicator (AI +1 nor 1) corresponding to the
selected signature is detected in the downlink access slot corresponding to the
selected uplink access slot:
B: select a signature
C: Increase the Commanded Preamble Power
A: Select the next available access slot in the set of available RACH subchannels within the given ASC
D: Decrease the Preamble Retransmission Counter by one. If the Preamble

Retransmission Counter > 0 then repeat from step 6. Otherwise exit the
physical random access procedure
7. If a negative acquisition indicator corresponding to the selected signature is

detected in the downlink access slot corresponding to the selected uplink access slot,
exit the physical random access procedure Signature
8. If a positive acquisition indicator corresponding to the selected signature is detected ,
Transmit the random access message three or four uplink access slots after the uplink
access slot of the last transmitted preamble
9. Exit the physical random access procedure
59
RRC Connection Message

z
Typical RRC connection messages
RRC_CONNECTION_REQUEST
RRC_CONNECTION_SETUP
RRC_CONNECTION_SETUP_COMPLETE
RRC_CONNECTION_RELEASE
Page59
When a UE needs network service, it first sets up RRC connection as follows:
The UE sends a RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the cell where it
camps to the RNC.
The RNC allocates related resources for the UE and sends an RRC CONNECTION
SETUP message to the UE.
The UE sends a RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the RNC. The
RRC connection setup ends.
60
UE Timers and Constants in Idle Mode

z
T300
Parameter name: Timer 300 [ms]
Recommended value: D2000, namely 2000ms
N300
Parameter name: Constant 300
T300
Page60
Parameter name: Timer 300[ms]

Value range: D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000, D1200, D1400, D1600, D1800,
D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000 .
Physical value range: 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000,
3000, 4000, 6000, 8000
Physical unit: ms
Content: T300 is started after the UE transmits the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST
message and stopped after the UE receives the RRC CONNECTION SETUP
message. RRC CONNECTION REQUEST resents upon the expiry of the timer if V300
less than or equal to N300. Otherwise, the UE enters idle mode.
Recommended value: D2000.
Set this parameter through SET IDLEMODETIMER, query it through SET
IDLEMODETIMER.
N300
Value range: 0~7 .
Content: Maximum number of retransmission of RRC CONNECTION REQUEST .

IDLEMODETIMER.
61
UE Timers and Constants in Idle Mode

z
T312
Parameter name: Timer 312 [s]
Recommended value: 6, namely 6s
N312
Recommended value: D1, namely 1
T312
Parameter name: Timer 312[s]
Value range: 1~15 .
Physical value range: 1~15s
Physical unit: s
Page61
Content: T312 is started after the UE starts to establish a DCH and stopped when the
UE detects N312 consecutive "in sync" indications from L1. It indicates physical
channel setup failure upon the expiry of the timer.
IDLEMODETIMER.
N312
Value range: D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000 .
Physical value range: 1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000
Content: Maximum number of consecutive "in sync" indications received from L1. .
Recommended value: D1.

IDLEMODETIMER.
62
RRC Connection Establish Channel

Type and Bit Rate
z
RRCCAUSE
Parameter name: Cause of RRC connection establishment
Recommended value: none
SIGCHTYPE
Parameter name: Channel type for RRC establishment
Recommended value: none
RRCCAUSE
Parameter name: Cause of RRC connection establishment
Value range: ORIGCONVCALLEST, ORIGSTREAMCALLEST, ORIGINTERCALLEST,

ORIGBKGCALLEST, ORIGSUBSTRAFFCALLEST, TERMCONVCALLEST,
TERMSTREAMCALLEST, TERMINTERCALLEST, TERMBKGCALLEST,
EMERGCALLEST, INTERRATCELLRESELEST, INTERRATCELLCHGORDEREST,
REGISTEST, DETACHEST, ORIGHIGHPRIORSIGEST, ORIGLOWPRIORSIGEST,
CALLREEST, TERMHIGHPRIORSIGEST, TERMLOWPRIORSIGEST,
TERMCAUSEUNKNOWN, DEFAULTEST.
Content: The cause of Rrc connection establishment. .
Recommended value: none.
Page62
Set this parameter through SET RRCESTCAUSE, query it through LST

RRCESTCAUSE.
SIGCHTYPE
Parameter name: Channel type for RRC establishment
Value range: FACH, DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING, DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING.

Content: FACH indicates that the RRC is established on the common channel.
DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING indicates that the RRC is established on the dedicated
channel of 3.4 kbit/s. DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING indicates that the RRC is established
on the dedicated channel of 13.6 kbit/s. .
Recommended value: none.
RRCESTCAUSE.
63
RRC Connection Establish Channel

Type and Bit Rate
z
INTRAMEASCTRL
Parameter name: IntraMeas Ctrl Ind for RRC establishment
Recommended value: SUPPORT
Page63
INTRAMEASCTRL
Parameter name: IntraMeas Ctrl Ind for RRC establishment
Value range: NOT_SUPPORT, SUPPORT.

Content: NOT_SUPPORT indicates that the Intrafreq measurement control message
will be send in RRC Connection Establishment. SUPPORT indicates that the Intrafreq
measurement control will not be send in RRC Connection Establishment.
Recommended value: SUPPORT .
RRCESTCAUSE.
64
Thank you
www.huawei.com
65
WCDMA Power Control

and Relevant Parameters
www.huawei.com
263
Objectives
z
Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Describe the purpose and function of power control
Explain open loop power control and parameters
Explain inner loop power control and relevant parameters
Explain outer loop power control and relevant parameters
Page1
264
Contents
1. Power Control Overview
2. Open Loop Power Control
3. Closed Loop Power Control
Page2
265
Contents
Page3
266
Purpose of Uplink Power Control

z
Uplink Transmission Character
Self-interference system
Uplink capacity is limited by interference level
Near-far effect
Fading
Uplink Power Control Function
Ensure uplink quality with minimum transmission power
Decrease interference to other UE, and increase capacity
Solve the near-far effect
Save UE transmission power
Page4
CDMA system have the embedded characteristics of self-interference, for uplink one
users transmission power become interference to others.
The more connected users, the higher interference. Generally the capacity is limited by
interference level.
WCDMA suffer from Near-far effect, which means if all UE use the same transmission
power, the one close to the NodeB may block the entire cell.
Uplink power control can guarantee the service quality and minimize the required
transmission power. It will resolve the near-far effect and resist fading of signal
propagation. By lowering the uplink interference level, the system capacity will be
increased.
267
Purpose of Downlink Power Control

z
Downlink Transmission Character
Interference among different subscribers
Interference from other adjacent cells
Downlink capacity is limited by NodeB transmission power
Fading
Downlink Power Control Function
Ensure downlink quality with minimum transmission power
Decrease interference to other cells, and increase capacity
Save NodeB transmission power
Page5
The downlink has different characteristics from the uplink, for downlink interference is
caused by multi-path, part of one users power also become interference to others.
Downlink power from adjacent cells also is one part of interference to the own cell.
Transmission power of NodeB is shared by all users channels, so downlink capacity

usually is considered to be limited by transmission power.
Downlink power control also can guarantee the service quality and minimize the
required transmission power, so the capacity is maximized in case that interference is
lowered.
268
Effect of Power Control

20
Channel Fading
15
Transmitting power
Receiving power
Relative power (dB)
10
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
0
200
400
600
800
Time (ms)
Page6
Because of channel fading in mobile communication system, the radio signal is

deteriorated and fluctuated, the fast power control become one key technology to resist
this phenomenon.
In this figure, the channel fading is compensated by the transmitting power, which is
adjusted by the fast power control, so the receiving power is almost constant and the
radio propagation condition is improved.
269
Power Control Classification

z
Open Loop Power Control
Uplink / Downlink Open Loop Power Control
Closed Loop Power Control
Uplink / Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
Uplink / Downlink Outer Loop Power Control
Page7
In WCDMA system, power control includes open loop and closed loop power control.
Open loop power control is used to determine the initial transmission power, and the
closed loop power control adjusts the transmission power dynamically and
continuously during the connection.
For uplink, the UEs transmission power is adjusted; and for downlink, the NodeBs
transmission power is adjusted.
270
Power Control For Physical Channels

z
Power control methods are adopted for these physical channels:
" can be applied, " not applied

Closed Loop Power Control
Physical
Channel
Open Loop
Power
Control
Inner Loop
Power Control
Outer Loop
Power Control
DPDCH
DPCCH
SCH
PCCPCH
SCCPCH
PRACH
AICH
PICH
No Power
Control
Page8
Open loop power control is used in two cases:
1. to decide the initial transmission power of PRACH preamble.
2. to decide the initial transmission power of DPCCH / DPDCH.
Closed loop power control is only applied on DPCCH and DPDCH
For other common channels, power control is not applied, they will use fixed
transmission power:
The PCPICH power is defined by the PCPICH TRANSMIT POWER parameter

as an absolute value in dBm.
All other common channels power is defined in relation with the PCPICH
TRANSMIT POWER parameter, and measured in dB.
271
Common Physical Channel Power Parameters

z
MAXTXPOWER
Parameter name: Max transmit power of cell
The recommended value is 430, namely 43dBm
PCPICHPOWER
Parameter name: PCPICH transmit power
Page9
MAXTXPOWER
Parameter name: Max transmit power of cell
Value Range: 0 to 500
Physical Value Range: 0dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1dB
Content: The sum of the maximum transmit power of all DL channels in a cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, query it through LST CELL and modify it
through MOD CELL
PCPICHPOWER
Parameter name: PCPICH transmit power
Value Range: -100 to 500
Physical Value Range: -10dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1dB
Content: This parameter should be set based on the actual environment and the
downlink coverage should be guaranteed firstly. If PCPICH transmit power is configured
too great, the cell capacity will be decreased, for power resources is occupied by
common channel and the interference to traffic channels is also increased.
Set this parameter through ADD PCPICH, query it through LST PCPICH and modify it
through MOD CELL
272

z
PSCHPOWER or SSCHPOWER
Parameter name: PSCH / SCCH transmit power
The recommended value is -50, namely -5dB
BCHPOWER
Parameter name: BCH transmit power
Page10
PSCHPOWER or SSCHPOWER
Parameter name: PSCH / SCCH transmit power
Value range: -350 to 150.
Physical value range: -35 to 15, step 0.1dB
Content: The offset between the PSCH / SSCH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
For PSCH Power, set it through ADD PSCH, and query it through LST PSCH; for SSCH
Power, set it through ADD SSCH, and query it through LST SSCH. And modify it through
MOD CELL
BCHPOWER
Parameter name: BCH transmit power
Value Range-350 to 150
Physical Value Range-35 to 15 dB, step 0.1dB
Content: The offset between the BCH transmit power and PCPICH transmit power.
Set this parameter through ADD BCH, query it through LST BCH, and modify it through
MOD CELL
273

z
MAXFACHPOWER
Parameter name: Max transmit power of FACH
The recommended value is 10, namely 1dB
PCHPOWER
Parameter name: PCH transmit power
MAXFACHPOWER
Parameter name: Max transmit power of FACH
Value range : -350 to 150
Page11
Content: The offset between the FACH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
Set this parameter through ADD FACH, query it through LST FACH, and modify
it through MOD SCCPCH
PCHPOWER
Parameter name: PCH transmit power
Value Range-350 to 150
Content: The offset between the PCH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
Set this parameter through ADD PCH, query it through LST PCH, and modify it
through MOD SCCPCH
274

z
AICHPOWEROFFSET
Parameter name: AICH power offset
The default value of this parameter is -6, namely -6dB
PICHPOWEROFFSET
Parameter name: PICH power offset
AICHPOWEROFFSET
Parameter name: AICH power offset
Value Range -22 to 5
Physical Value Range -22 to 5 dB, step 1dB
Page12
Content: The offset between the AICH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
Set this parameter through ADD CHPWROFFSET, query it through LST
CHPWROFFSET, and modify it through MOD AICHPWROFFSET
PICHPOWEROFFSET
Parameter name: PICH power offset
Value Range-10 to 5
Physical Value Range-10 to 5 dB , step 1dB
Content: The offset between the PICH transmit power and PCPICH transmit
power.
Set this parameter through ADD CHPWROFFSET, query it through LST
CHPWROFFSET, and modify it through MOD PICHPWROFFSET
275
Contents
Page13
276
Contents
2.1 Open Loop Power Control Overview
2.2 PRACH Open Loop Power Control
2.3 Downlink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control
2.4 Uplink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control
Page14
277
Open Loop Power Control Overview

z
Purpose
Calculate the initial transmission power of uplink / downlink channels
Principle
Estimates the downlink signal power loss on propagation path
Path loss of the uplink channel is related to the downlink channel
Application
Open loop power control is applied only at the beginning of connection

setup to set the initial power value.
Page15
In downlink open loop power control, the initial transmission power is calculated
according to the downlink path loss between NodeB and UE.
In uplink, since the uplink and downlink frequencies of WCDMA are in the same
frequency band, a significant correlation exists between the average path loss of the
two links. This make it possible for each UE to calculate the initial transmission power
required in the uplink based on the downlink path loss.
However, there is 90MHz frequency interval between uplink and downlink frequencies,
the fading between the uplink and downlink is uncorrelated, so the open loop power
control is not absolutely accurate.
278
Contents
Page16
279
PRACH Open Loop Power Control

Serving
RNC
Node B
UE
1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request

RRC
RRC
Open loop power

control of PRACH
Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
parameters
2. Radio Link Setup Request
NBAP
NBAP
Start RX
description
3. Radio Link Setup Response
NBAP
NBAP
4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup
DCH - FP
DCH - FP
5. Downlink Synchronization
6. Uplink Synchronization
DCH - FP
DCH - FP
Start TX
description
RRC
7. CCCH: RRC Connection Set up
RRC
8. Radio Link Restore Indication

NBAP
RRC
NBAP
9. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete
RRC
Page17
In access procedure, the first signaling RRC CONNECTION REQUEST is

transmitted in message part on PRACH.
Before PRACH message part transmission, UE will transmit PRACH preamble, and
the transmission power of first preamble is calculated by this PRACH open loop power
control.
280

z
Initial Power Calculation for the First Preamble
When UE needs to set up a RRC connection, the initial power

of uplink PRACH can be calculated according to the following
formula:
Preamble_I nitial_Pow er = PCPICH Transmit Power - CPICH_RSCP

+ UL Interferen ce + Constant Value For Calculatin g Initial Tx Power
Page18
In this formula, where
PCPICH TRANSMIT POWER defines the PCPICH transmit power in a cell. It is

broadcast in SIB5.
CPICH_RSCP means received signal code power, the received power

measured on the PCPICH. The measurement is performed by the UE.
UL interference is the UL RTWP measured by the NodeB. It is broadcast in SIB7.
CONSTANT VALUE compensates for the RACH processing gain. It is broadcast

in SIB5.
The initial value of PRACH power is set through open loop power control. UE operation
steps are as follows:
1. Read Primary CPICH DL TX power, UL interference and Constant value

from system information.
2. Measure the value of CPICH_RSCP;
3. Calculate the Preamble_Initial_Power of PRACH.
281
PRACH Open Loop Power Control Parameters

z
CONSTANTVALUE
Parameter name: Constant value for calculating initial TX

power
Page19
CONSTANTVALUE
Parameter name: Constant value for calculating initial TX power
Value range : -35 ~ -10
Physical Value Range-35 to -10 dB
Content: It is used to calculate the transmit power of the first preamble in the
random access process.
Set this parameter through ADD PRACHBASIC, query it through LST PRACH,
and modify it through MOD PRACHUUPARAS
282

z
Timing relationship of PRACH and AICH
1 access slot
Acq.
Ind.
AICH
p-a
PRACH
Preamble
Preamble
p-p
Message
part
p-m
Page20
After UE transmit the first Preamble on PRACH, it will wait for the corresponding AI
(Acquisition Indicator) on the AICH. The timing relationship of PRACH and AICH is
shown in above figure.
There will be 3 parameters used to define the timing relationship:
p-p: time interval between two PRACH preambles. p-p is not a fixed value, it is
decided by selecting access slot of PRACH preambles,
Here p-p has one restriction, it must be longer than a minimum value p-p min ,
namely p-p p-p min.
p-a: time interval between PRACH preamble and AICH Acquisition Indicator. If
UE sends the PRACH preamble, it will detect the responding AI after p-a time.
p-m: time interval between PRACH preamble and PRACH message part. If UE
sends the PRACH preamble and receives positive AI from the AICH, it will send
the message part after p-m time.
283

z
AICHTXTIMING
Parameter name: AICH transmission timing
Content:
When AICHTXTIMING = 0,
p-p,min = 15360 chips, p-a = 7680 chips, p-m = 15360 chips
The recommended value is 1
Page21
Parameter AICHTXTIMING is used to define the set of p-p min, p-a, p-m.
AICHTXTIMING
Parameter name: AICH transmission timing
Value range0,1
Content:
Set this parameter through ADD AICH, query it through LST AICH, and modify it
needs de-activated the cell through DEA CELL. After the old configuration of
AICH is deleted through RMV AICH , a new AICH can be established through
ADD AICH
284

z
Power Ramping for Preamble Retransmission
Power Offset Pp-m

Power Ramp Step
Preamble_Initial
_Power
Preamble
Preamble
Preamble
Preamble
Message
part
Page22
After UE transmit the first Preamble,
If no positive or negative AI on AICH is received after p-a time,
UE shall increase the preamble power by POWER RAMP STEP, and

retransmit the preamble.
This ramping process stops until the number of transmitted preambles has
reached the MAX PREAMBLE RETRANSMISSION within an access cycle,
or when the maximum number of access cycles has reached MAX
PREAMBLE LOOP.
If a negative AI on AICH is received by the UE after p-a time,
which indicates rejection of the preamble, the UE shall wait for a certain
Back-off Delay and re-initiate a new random access process.
When a positive AI on AICH is received by UE after p-a time,
it will transmit the random access message after the uplink access slot of
the last preamble.
The transmit power of the random access message control part should be
POWER OFFSET higher than the power of the last transmitted preamble.
285

z
POWERRAMPSTEP
Parameter name: Power increase step
PREAMBLERETRANSMAX
Parameter name: Max preamble retransmission
The Recommended value is 20
Page23
POWERRAMPSTEP
Parameter name: Power increase step
Value range : 1 to 8
Physical Value Range: 1 to 8 dB
Content: The power increase step of the random access preambles transmitted
before the UE receives the acquisition indicator in the random access process.
PREAMBLERETRANSMAX
Parameter name: Max preamble retransmission
Content: The maximum number of preambles transmitted in a preamble ramping

cycle.
286

z
MMAX
Parameter name: Max preamble loop
The recommended value is 8
NB01MIN / NB01MAX
Parameter name: Random back-off lower / upper limit
The recommended value: 0 for both NB01MIN / NB01MAX
MMAX
Parameter name: Max preamble loop
Value range: 1 to 32
Content: The maximum number of random access preamble loops.
Page24
Set this parameter through ADD RACH, query it through LST RACH, and modify
it first de-activated the cell through DEA CELL, then MOD RACH.
NB01MIN / NB01MAX
Parameter name: Random back-off lower / upper limit
Content: The lower / upper limit of random access back-off delay.
The recommended value: 0 for both NB01MIN / NB01MAX
Set this parameter through ADD RACH, query it through LST RACH, and modify
it first de-activated the cell through DEA CELL, then MOD RACH.
287

z
POWEROFFSETPPM
Parameter name: Power offset
The default value:

-3dB for signalling transmission;
-2dB for service transmission.
Page25
POWEROFFSETPPM
Parameter name: Power offset
Value range: -5 to 10dB
Content: The power offset between the last access preamble and the message
control part. The power of the message control part can be obtained by adding
the offset to the access preamble power.
The recommended value of this parameter is -3dB for signalling transmission ,
and that -2dB for service transmission
Set this parameter through ADD PRACHTFC, query it through LST PRACH, and
modify it de-activated the cell through DEA CELL . After the old configuration of
PRACH is deleted through RMV PRACHTFC , a new parameters can be
established through ADD PRACHTFC
The PRACH message also consists of control part and data part, here the POWER
OFFSET is the difference between the PRACH preamble and the message control part.
The PRACH message uses GAIN FACTOR to set the power of control / data part:
GAIN FACTOR BETAC ( c ) is the gain factor for the control part.
GAIN FACTOR BETAD ( d ) is the gain factor for the data part.
288
Contents
Page26
289
DL DPDCH Open Loop Power Control

Serving
RNC
Node B
UE

RRC
RRC
Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
parameters
NBAP
NBAP
Start RX
description
NBAP
NBAP
DL DPDCH Open
Loop Power Control
DCH - FP
DCH - FP
DCH - FP
DCH - FP
Start TX
description
RRC
RRC

NBAP
NBAP
RRC
RRC
Page27
According to the RRC connection establishment procedure, after RNC received the
RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message, and NodeB set up the radio link for UE,
then Iub interface resources is established between NodeB and RNC.
When DCH-FP of Iub interface finished downlink and uplink synchronization, the
downlink DPCH starts to transmit, and DPDCH initial transmission power is calculated
through open loop power control.
290

z
When a dedicated channel is set up, the initial power of

downlink DPDCH can be calculated according to the
following formula:
PInitial =
PCPICH
R
Eb
)DL
(
PTotal
W
No
( Ec / No )CPICH
Page28
In this formula, where
R is the requested data bitrate by the user
W is the chip rate
(Eb/No)DL is the Eb/No target to ensure the service quality. RNC searches for
the (Eb/No)DL dynamically in a set of pre-defined values according to specific cell
environment type, coding type, bitrate, BLER target and etc.
(Ec/Io)CPICH is the CPICH signal quality measured by UE, then it is sent to RNC
through RACH.
is the orthogonality factor in the downlink. In Huawei implementation, is set

to 0.
Ptotal is the total carrier transmit power measured at the NodeB
The initial transmission power of downlink DPDCH could be calculated through this
formula, then, initial transmission power of downlink DPCCH can be obtained
according to the power offset: PO1, PO2 and PO3.
291
1 timeslot
Downlink
Transmit
Power
PO2
PO1
PO3
Data1
DPDCH
TPC
TFCI
DPCCH
Data2
Pilot
DPDCH
DPCCH
Page29
This figure shows the power offset of downlink DPCH :
PO1 is the power offset of DPCCH TFCI bits to DPDCH data bits.
PO2 is the power offset of DPCCH TPC bits to DPDCH data bits.
PO3 is the power offset of DPCCH Pilot bits to DPDCH data bits.
The values of PO1, PO2 and PO3 are configured on RNC.
292
DL DPDCH Open Loop Power Control Parameter

z
TFCIPO
Parameter name: TFCI power offset
TPCPO
Parameter name: TPC power offset
TFCIPO
Parameter name: TFCI power offset
Physical value range: 0 to 6 dB, step: 0.25
Page30
Content: The offset of TFCI bit transmit power from data bit transmit power in
each time slot of radio frames on DL DPCH
Set this parameter through SET FRC, query it through LST FRC, and modify it
through SET FRC
TPCPO
Parameter name: TPC power offset
Content: The offset of TPC bit transmit power from data bit transmit power in
through SET FRC
293
DL DPDCH Open Loop Power Control Parameter

z
PILOTPO
Parameter name: Pilot power offset
Page31
PILOTPO
Parameter name: Pilot power offset
Content: The offset of pilot bit transmit power from data bit transmit power in
through SET FRC
294
Downlink Power Control Restriction

z
The power of downlink dedicated channel is limited by an

upper and lower limit for each radio link.
The DL DPDCH power could not exceed Maximum_DL_Power,

nor could it be below Minimum_DL_Power.
RLMAXDLPWR / RLMINDLPWR
Parameter name: RL Max / Min DL TX power
The recommended value is shown in the following table.
Page32
Note: Both downlink open loop and close loop power control will be limited by this parameter.
RLMAXDLPWR
Parameter name: RL Max DL TX power
Content: The maximum downlink transmit power of radio link. This parameter should
fulfill the coverage requirement of the network planning, and the value is relative to
[PCPICH transmit power]
Set this parameter through ADD CELLRLPWR , query it through LST CELLRLPWR, and
modify it through MOD CELLRLPWR
RLMINDLPWR
Parameter name: RL Min DL TX power
Content: The minimum downlink transmit power of radio link. This parameter should
consider the maximum downlink transmit power and the dynamic range of power control,
and the value is relative to [PCPICH transmit power].
Since the dynamic range of power control is set as 15dB, this parameter is
recommended as [RL Max DL TX power] 15 dB.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLRLPWR, query it through LST CELLRLPWR, and
modify it through MOD CELLRLPWR
295
Downlink Power Restriction Parameters

z
Referential configurations for typical services:

Service
RL Max Downlink
Transmit Power
RL Min Downlink
Transmit Power
Downlink SF
CS Domain
12.2 kbps AMR
-3
-18
128
28 kbps
-2
-17
64
32 kbps
-2
-17
64
56 kbps
-15
32
64 kbps
-15
32
PS Domain
8 kbps
-8
-23
128
32 kbps
-4
-19
64
64 kbps
-2
-17
32
144 kbps
-15
16
256 kbps
-13
384 kbps
-11
Page33
296
Contents
Page34
297
UL DPCCH Open Loop Power Control

Serving
RNC
Node B
UE
RRC
RRC
Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
parameters

NBAP
NBAP
Start RX
description
NBAP
NBAP
DCH - FP
DCH - FP
DCH - FP
DCH - FP
Start TX
description
RRC
Open Loop Power

Control of UL DPCCH
RRC
NBAP
RRC

NBAP
RRC
Page35
According to the RRC connection establishment procedure, after RNC sent the RRC
CONNECTION SETUP message, UE will try to synchronize with NodeB, and the
uplink DPCCH starts to transmit, here DPCCH initial transmission power is calculated
through open loop power control
298
UL DPCCH Open Loop Power Control

The initial power of the uplink DPCCH can be calculated
according to the following formula:
DPCCH _ Initial _ Power = DPCCH _ Power _ Offset CPICH _ RSCP

Where
CPICH_RSCP means the received signal code power, the received

power measured on the CPICH.
DPCCH_Power_Offset is provided by RNC to the UE via RRC
signaling.
Page36
For Huawei, DPCCH_Power_Offset is calculated with the following formula:
DPCCH _ Power _ Offset = PCPICH Transmit Power + UL Interference

+ Default Cons tan t Value
z
Where
PCPICH Transmit Power defines the PCPICH transmit power in a cell.
UL Interference is the UL RTWP measured by the NodeB.
Default Constant Value reflects the target Ec/No of the uplink DPCCH
preamble.
299
UL DPCCH Open Loop Power Control Parameter

z
DEFAULTCONSTANTVALUE
Parameter name: Constant value configured by default
The recommended value is -27, namely -27dB.
Page37
DEFAULTCONSTANTVALUE
Parameter name: Constant value configured by default
Value range : -35 to -10 , unit :dB
Content: This parameter is used to obtain DPCCH_Power_Offset, which is used

by UE to calculate the initial transmit power of UL DPCCH during the open loop
power control process.
through SET FRC
300
Uplink Power Control Restriction

z
During the operation of uplink power control, the UE

transmit power shall not exceed the Maximum Allowed
Uplink Transmit Power.
MAXALLOWEDULTXPOWER
The recommended value is 21, namely 21 dBm.
Page38
MAXALLOWEDULTXPOWER
Value range: -50 to 33
Physical value range: -50 to 33 dBm. Step: 1
Content: The maximum allowed uplink transmit power of a UE in the cell, which
is related to the network planning.

CELLSELRESEL, and modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL
301
Uplink Power Control Restriction

z
In addition, there are four parameters which correspond to the maximum

allowed transmit power of four classes of services respectively:
MAXULTXPOWERFORCONV
MAXULTXPOWERFORSTR
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Streaming service
MAXULTXPOWERFORINT
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Conversational service
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Interactive service
MAXULTXPOWERFORBAC
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Background service
The recommended value is 24, namely 24 dBm.
MAXULTXPOWERFORCONV
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Streaming service
MAXULTXPOWERFORINT
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Conversational service
MAXULTXPOWERFORSTR
Page39
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Interactive service
MAXULTXPOWERFORBAC
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of Background service
Physical value range: -50 to 33 dBm. Step: 1
Content: The maximum UL transmit power for specific service in the cell, which
is related to the network planning.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC,
and modify it through MOD CELLCAC
302
Contents
Page40
303
Contents
3.1 Closed Loop Power Control Overview
3.2 Uplink Inner Loop Power Control
3.3 Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
3.4 Outer Loop Power Control
Page41
304
Closed Loop Power Control Overview

z
Why closed loop power control is needed?
Open loop power control is not accurate enough, it can only

estimate the initial transmission power.
Closed loop power control can guarantee the QoS with
minimum power. By decreasing the interference, the system
capacity will be increased.
Outer Loop
Inner Loop
SIRmea>SIRtar TPC=0
BLERmea>BLERtarSIRtar
SIRtar
BLERtar BLER <BLER SIR
mea
tar
tar
Until
BLERmea=BLERtar
TPC
SIRmea<SIRtar TPC=1
TPC=1
TPC=0
Power
Power
Until
SIRmea=SIRtar
Page42
Inner Loop Power Control

z
The receiver compares SIRmea (measured SIR) with SIRtar (target SIR), and decide the TPC to
send.
If SIRmea is greater than SIRtar, the TPC is set as 0 to increase transmission power
If SIRmea is less than SIRtar, the TPC is set as 1 to decrease transmission power
TPC is sent to the transmitter in DPCCH, the transmitter will adjust the power according to the
value of received TPC.
Through inner loop power control, the SIRmea can be ensured to approach SIRtar.
Outer Loop Power Control

z
The receiver compares BLERmea (measured BLER) with BLERtar (target BLER), and decide how
to set the SIRtar.
If BLERmea is greater than BLERtar, the SIRtar is increased
If BLERmea is less than BLERtar, the SIRtar is decreased
The adjusted SIRtar is sent for the inner loop power control, then it will be used in previous
process to guide the transmitter power adjustment.
Through outer loop power control, the BLERmea can be ensured to approach BLERtar.
305
Contents
Page43
306
Uplink Inner Loop Power Control

z
NodeB compares the measured SIR to the preset target SIR, then derives
TPC and sends the TPC Decision to UE.
TPC Decision
( 0, 1 )
Compare SIRmea with SIRtar

SIRmea > SIRtar TPC = 0
SIRmea SIRtar TPC = 1
Single RL / Soft HO
PCA1 / PCA2
Generate TPC_cmd
( -1, 0, 1 )
Inner Loop
Adjust DPCCH Tx
Set SIRtar
NodeB
Transmit TPC
UE
DPCCH =TPCTPC_cmd
Adjust DPDCH Tx
( c , d )
Page44
RNC sends SIRtar (target SIR) to NodeB and then NodeB compares SIRmea (measured
SIR) with SIRtar once every timeslot.
If the estimated SIR is greater than the target SIR, NodeB sends TPC 0 to UE
on downlink DPCCH TPC field.
Otherwise, NodeB sends TPC 1 to UE.
After reception of one or more TPC in a slot, UE shall derive a single TPC_cmd (TPC
command, with value among -1,0,1):
For UE is in soft handover state, more than one TPC is received in a slot, so
firstly multiple TPC_cmd is combined.
Two algorithms could be used by the UE for deriving the TPC_cmd, those are
PCA1 and PCA2 (PCA means Power Control Algorithm).
When deriving the combined TPC_cmd, UE shall adjust the transmit power of uplink
DPCCH with a step UL Closed Loop Power Control Step Size, as following:
DPCCH =TPCTPC_cmd
This adjustment is executed on the DPCCH, then associated DPDCH transmit power
is calculated according to DPDCH / DPCCH power ratio d / c.
307
Uplink Inner Loop PCA1 with Single Radio Link

z
For single radio link and PCA1, UE derives one TPC_cmd in each
time slot as follows:
TPC
TPC_cmd
-1
-1
-1
-1
This control is performed in each time slot, so

the power control frequency is 1500Hz
Page45
When UE has single radio link, only one TPC will be received in each slot. In this case,
the value of TPC_cmd shall be derived by PCA1 as follows:
If the received TPC is equal to 0, then TPC_cmd for that slot is 1.
If the received TPC is equal to 1, then TPC_cmd for that slot is 1.
According to DPCCH channel structure, there are 15 time slots in a 10ms radio frame,
and the control is performed once in each time slot, so the frequency of uplink inner
loop PCA1 is 1500Hz.
308
Uplink Inner Loop PCA2 with Single Radio Link

z
For single radio link and PCA2, UE derives one TPC_cmd in each
5-slot group as follows:
10ms radio frame
TPC
Group 2
Group 1
Group 3
TS0
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
-1
TPC_cmd
This control is performed in each 5-slot group,

so the power control frequency is 300Hz
Page46
When UE has single radio link, only one TPC will be received in each slot. In this case,
the value of TPC_cmd shall be derived by PCA2 as follows:
For the first 4 slots of a set, TPC_cmd = 0.
For the fifth slot of a set, UE make the decisions on as follows:
If all 5 TPC within a group are 1, then TPC_cmd = 1 in the 5th slot.
If all 5 TPC within a group are 0, then TPC_cmd = -1 in the 5th slot.
Otherwise, TPC_cmd = 0 in the 5th slot.
According to DPCCH channel structure, there are 15 time slots in a 10ms radio frame,
and the control is performed once in each 5-slot group, so the frequency of uplink inner
loop PCA2 is 500Hz.
309
Uplink Inner Loop with Soft Handover

z
When UE enters soft handover state, on the NodeB side,

there are two phases :
Uplink synchronization phase
Multi-radio link phase
On UE side, UE will receive different TPCs from different

RLS in one time slot. Therefore, the UE should combine all
the TPCs to get a unique TPC_CMD.
Page47
On the NodeB side, there are two phases during the soft handover state:
Uplink synchronization phase

The NodeB should send durative TPC = 1 to the newly-added RL before
successful synchronization.
Multi-radio link phase

Each NodeB and each cell will estimate the SIR individually and the general
TPC individually. Therefore, the UE may receive different TPC from different
RLS.
Especially, when UE is in softer handover state, it means UE has radio links to the
same NodeB, in this case, these RLs (Radio Link) belong to the same RLS (Radio Link
Set), and the all TPCs are the same from each RL.
310
Uplink Inner Loop PCA1 with Soft Handover

CELL1
For each slot, combine TPC from

the same RLS, then get Wi
CELL2
RL1-1
RL1-2
RLS1
Get TPC_cmd based on

TPC_cmd = (W1, W2, WN)
RLS3
RLS2
CELL4
CELL3
RLS1-TPC (W1)
RLS2-TPC (W2)
RLS3-TPC (W3)
TPC_cmd
-1 -1
-1 -1
-1 -1 -1 -1
Page48
When UE is in soft handover state, multiple TPC will be received in each slot from
different cells in the active set. UE will generate the TPC_cmd by PCA1 as follows:
1. Combine the TPC from the same RLS and derive the Wi
When the RLs (Radio Link) are in the same RLS (Radio Link Set), they will
transmit the same TPC in a slot. In this case, the TPCs from the same RLS shall
be combined into one.
After combination, UE will obtain a soft symbol decision Wi for each RLSi.
2. Combine the TPC from different RLSs and derive the TPC_cmd
UE derives TPC_cmd, it is based on a function and all the N soft symbol

decisions Wi:
TPC_cmd = (W1, W2, WN),
Where TPC_cmd can only take the values 1 or -1.
In Huawei implementation, the function shall fulfil the following criteria:

If the TPCs from all RLSs are 1, the output of shall be equal to 1 ;
If one TPC from any RLS is 0, the output of shall be equal to -1.
311

Combine TPC from same RLS
in each time slot
CELL1
CELL2
RL1-1
Calculate TPC_cmd
If any TPC_tempi = -1, TPC_cmd = -1
If
1
N
TPC _ temp i > 0.5 , TPC_cmd = 1
RL1-2
RLS1
Calculate TPC_tempi for each RLSi
RLS2
RLS3
CELL4
CELL3
i =1
Otherwise, TPC_cmd = 0
Page49
When UE is in soft handover state, multiple TPC will be received in each slot from
different cells in the active set. UE will generate the TPC_cmd by PCA2 as follows:
1. Combine the TPC from the same RLS.
When the RLs are in the same RLS, they will transmit the same TPC in a slot. In
this case, the TPCs from the same RLS shall be combined into one.
2. Calculate the TPC_tempi for each RLS

UE derives TPC_tempi through the same way in the last slide, as follows:
For the first 4 slots of a group, TPC_tempi = 0.
For the 5th slot of a group:
If all 5 TPCs within a group are 1, then TPC_tempi = 1 in the 5th slot.
If all 5 TPCs within a group are 0, then TPC_tempi = -1 in the 5th slot.
Otherwise, TPC_tempi = 0 in the 5th slot.
3. Calculate the TPC_cmd

UE derives TPC_cmd through the following criteria:
If any TPC_tempi is equal to -1, TPC_cmd is set to -1.
If
1
N
TPC _ temp
> 0.5 , TPC_cmd = 1
i =1
Otherwise, TPC_cmd = 0
312

10ms/frame
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
TPC
TS0
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
RLS1
RLS2
RLS3
TS14
TPC_tempi
TS0
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
RLS1
-1
RLS2
-1
RLS3
-1
TS0
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
-1
TPC_cmd
Page50
The example of the uplink inner loop PCA2 in soft handover state.
313
Uplink Inner Loop Power Control Parameters

z
PWRCTRLALG
Parameter name: Power control algorithm selection
The recommended value is ALGORITHM1
ULTPCSTEPSIZE
Parameter name: UL closed loop power control step size
Page51
PWRCTRLALG
Parameter name: Power control algorithm selection
Value range: ALGORITHM1, ALGORITHM2
Content: This parameter is used to inform the UE of the method for translating
the received TPC commands.
Recommended value: ALGORITHM1
through SET FRC
ULTPCSTEPSIZE
Parameter name: UL closed loop power control step size
Value range :1dB, 2dB
Content: The step size of the closed loop power control performed on UL
DPDCH. This parameter is mandatory when the parameter Power control
algorithm selection is set as "ALGORITHM1".
through SET FRC
314
Contents
Page52
315
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control

z
UE L1 compares the measured SIR to the preset target SIR, then derives
TPC and sends the TPC Decision to NodeB.
L3 Set SIRtar
Derive TPCest(k)
( 0, 1 )
DPC_MODE
Inner Loop
Generate PTPC(k)
Calculate P(k)
L1 compare
SIRmea with
SIRtar
NodeB
Derive and transmit

TPC based on
DPC_MODE
UE
Adjust DPCH Tx Power
Page53
Basically the downlink inner loop power control process is similar with uplink, UE L3
sends SIRtar to UE L1 and then UE L1 compares SIRmea with SIRtar :
If the SIRmea is greater than the SIRtar , UE sends TPC 0 to NodeB on uplink
DPCCH TPC field.
Otherwise, UE sends TPC 1 to NodeB.
The UE shall check the downlink power control mode before generating the TPC, two
algorithm DPC_MODE1 and DPC_MODE2 could be used by UE to derive the TPC.
Upon receiving the TPC, NodeB shall estimate the transmitted TPC and adjust its
downlink DPCCH/DPDCH power accordingly.
After reception of one or more TPC in a slot, NodeB shall derive the estimated TPC
TPCest(k) and calculate a PTPC(k), the power adjustment of k:th slot.
Then NodeB shall adjust the current downlink power P(k-1) to a new power P(k), and
adjust the power of the DPCCH and DPDCH with the same amount, since power
difference between them is fixed.
316
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control Mode

z
Two DPC_MODE (Downlink Power Control Mode) could be

used:
If DPC_MODE = 0, UE sends a unique TPC in each slot,

UTRAN shall derive TPCest to be 0 or 1, and update the power
every slot;
If DPC_MODE = 1, UE repeats the same TPC over 3 slots,

UTRAN shall derive TPCest over three slots to be 0 or 1, and
update the power every three slots.
Page54
The DPC_MODE parameter is a UE specific parameter and controlled by the UTRAN.
The UE shall check the DPC_MODE (Downlink Power Control Mode) before
generating the TPC, and upon receiving the TPC, the UTRAN shall adjust its downlink
power accordingly.
317
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control Parameters

z
DPCMODE
Parameter name: Downlink power control mode
The recommended value is SINGLE_TPC, namely

DPC_MODE = 0
Page55
DPCMODE
Parameter name: Downlink power control mode
Value range: SINGLE_TPC (DPC_MODE=0), TPC_TRIPLET_IN_SOFT

(DPC_MODE=1), TPC_AUTO_ADJUST
Content:
SIGNLE_TPC, a fast power control mode, indicates that a unique TPC
command is sent in each time slot on DPCCH.
TPC_TRIPLET_IN_SOFT, a slow power control mode, indicates that the same
TPC is sent in three time slots, it is applicable to soft handover and it can
decrease the power deviation.
TPC_AUTO_ADJUST, an automatically adjusted mode, indicates that the value
of DPC_MODE can be modified by sending the message ACTIVE SET
UPDATE to UE.
Recommended value: SINGLE_TPC

through SET FRC
318

z
After estimating the TPC, the UTRAN shall set the downlink power
to P(k) for k:th slot according to the following formula:
P ( k ) = P ( k 1 ) + PTPC ( k ) + Pbal ( k )
Where
P(k-1) is downlink transmission power in (k-1):th slot
PTPC(k) is the adjustment of downlink power in k:th slot
Pbal (k) is correction value according to the downlink power balance

procedure. For a single radio link, Pbal (k) equals 0.
Page56
If DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH is OFF, then Pbal(k) equals 0.
319

z
PTPC(k) is calculated according to the following:
If the value of Limited Power Increase Used parameter is Not

Used , then:
+
PTPC ( k ) = TPC
TPC
if TPC est ( k ) = 1
if TPC est ( k ) = 0
Where
TPCest (k) is uplink received TPC of the k:th slot
TPC is downlink power adjustment step size
Page57
320
If the value of Limited Power Increase Used parameter is

Used , then:
+ TPC
PTPC ( k ) = 0

TPC
Where
if TPCest ( k ) = 1 and sum ( k ) + TPC < Power _ Raise _ Limit

if TPCest ( k ) = 1 and sum ( k ) + TPC Power _ Raise _ Limit
if TPCest ( k ) = 0
sum ( k ) =
k 1
PTPC ( i )
i = k DL _ Power _ Average _ Window_ Size
Page58
Where,
z
Power_Raise_Limit : the restriction value of power increasing within a period
DL_Power_Average_Window_Size : the period of DL transmit power increasing.
From the definition above, sum(k) indicates the sum of downlink power adjustment in
the latest DL_Power_Average_Window_Size time slots.
321

z
INNER_LOOP_DL_LMTED_PWR_INC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PCSWITCH (Power control algorithm

switch) parameter.
The default value is 0, namely OFF.
POWERRAISELIMIT
Parameter name: Power increase limit
The recommended value is 10dB
INNER_LOOP_DL_LMTED_PWR_INC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PcSwitch (Power control algorithm switch) parameter.
Value range1 (ON) , 0 (OFF)
Page59
Content: When it is checked, limited power increase algorithm is applied in the

inner loop power control. limited power increase algorithm means that when the
DL transmit power is increased, there is a limit for the step, that is, each increase
is limited.
Recommended value (default value): 0
Set this parameter through SET CORRMALGOSWITCH, query it through LST
CORRMALGOSWITCH, and modify it through SET CORRMALGOSWITCH
POWERRAISELIMIT
Parameter name: Power increase limit
Value range: 0 to 10 dB
Content: The increase of DL transmit power within

DL_Power_Average_Window_Size cannot exceed this parameter value.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, query it through LST CELL, and
modify it through MOD CELLSETUP
322

z
DLPOWERAVERAGEWINDOWSIZE
Parameter name: DL power average window size
The recommended value is 20 time slots
FDDTPCDLSTEPSIZE
Parameter name: FDD DL power control step size
The recommended value is STEPSIZE_1DB, namely 1dB
Page60
DLPOWERAVERAGEWINDOWSIZE
Parameter name: DL power average window size
Value range: 1 to 60 time slots
Content: UTRAN calculates the increase of DL transmit power within the period defined
via this parameter to determine whether the increase exceeds Power Raise Limit. If so,
UTRAN will not increase the power even when it receives the command to raise the
power
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, query it through LST CELL ,and modify it
through MOD CELLSETUP
FDDTPCDLSTEPSIZE
Parameter name: FDD DL power control step size
Value range: STEPSIZE_0.5DB, STEPSIZE_1DB, STEPSIZE_1.5DB, STEPSIZE_2DB
Physical value range: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2 dB
Content: The step size of the closed loop power control performed on DL DPCH in
Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode.
Recommended value: STEPSIZE_1DB
Set this parameter through SET FRC, query it through LST FRC, and modify it through
SET FRC
323
Downlink Power Balance

z
Purpose
Monitor the
Tx power of
NodeBs and
start the DPB
process
The purpose of this procedure is to

balance the DL transmission powers of
more than one Radio Links.
The start and stop of DPB
The power offset of two RLs is greater

than the DPB start threshold, the DPB
process is started
NodeB
NodeB
The power offset of two RLs is less

than the DPB stop threshold, the DPB
process is stopped
DPB process
Page61
During soft handover, the UL TPC is demodulated in each RLS, then due to
demodulation errors, the DL transmit power of the each branch in soft handover will
drift separately, which causes loss to the macro-diversity gain.
The DL Power Balance (DPB) algorithm is introduced to reduce the power drift
between links during the soft handover.
324
Downlink Power Balance Parameters

z
DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH
This is one switch in PCSWITCH (Power control algorithm switch)

parameter.
The default value is 0, namely OFF.
DPBSTARTTHD / DPBSTOPTHD
Parameter name: DPB start threshold / DPB stop threshold
The recommended value:

DPB start threshold 8, namely 4dB;
DPB stop threshold 4, namely 2dB.
Page62
DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH
This is one switch in PcSwitch (Power control algorithm switch) parameter.
Content: When it is checked, Downlink Power Balance (DPB) algorithm is applied to RNC.
Downlink power drift among different RLs, which is caused by TPC bit error or other
reasons, could reduce the gain of soft handover. DPB is mainly used to balance the
downlink power of different RLs for an UE in order to achieve the best gain of soft
handover.
Recommended value (default value): 0

DPBSTARTTHD / DPBSTOPTHD
Parameter name: DPB start threshold / DPB stop threshold
Value range: 0~255
Physical value range: 0~127.5dB; step: 0.5
Content: The threshold of start / stop DL power balancing in soft handover. When the
difference of the power values of every two paths is greater / smaller than or equal to this
threshold in soft handover, the RNC shall start / stop DL power balancing; otherwise,
shall not.
The recommended value is DPB start threshold 8, namely 4dB; DPB stop threshold 4,
namely 2dB;
Set this parameter through SET DPB, query it through LST DPB and modify it through
SET DPB
325
Contents
Page63
326
Outer Loop Power Control

z
Why we need outer loop power control?
Different curves
correspond to
different multi-path
environment
BLER
SIR
The reason of outer loop power control
Page64
The QoS which NAS provides to CN is BLER, not SIR
The relationship between inner loop power control and outer loop power control
SIRtar should be satisfied with the requirement of decoding correctly. But

different multi-path radio environments request different SIR
Therefore, the outer loop power control can adjust the SIR to get a stable BLER
in the changeable radio environment
327
Uplink Outer Loop Power Control
Measure BLER of received

data and compare with the
BLERtar
Measure SIR and

compare with SIRtar
Out loop
Set BLERtar
Transmit TPC
Set SIRtar
RNC
Inner loop
NodeB
UE
Page65
Uplink outer-loop power control is performed in the SRNC. The SRNC measures the
received BLER and compares it with the BLERtar. If the BLERmea is greater than the
BLERtar, the SRNC increases the SIRtar; otherwise, the SRNC decreases the SIRtar.
328

z
SIRtar Adjustment
BLER meas ,i ( n 1 ) BLER tar ,i

SIRtar ( n ) = MAX SIRtar ( n 1 ) +
Step i Factor
BLER tar ,i
Where
i is the i:th transmission channel.
n is the n:th adjustment period.
Page66
According to the formula above,
SIRtar(n) is the target SIR used for the n:th adjustment period.
MAX means the maximum value among the total i transmission channels.
BLERmeas,i (n) is measured for the i:th transmission channel in the n:th
adjustment period.
BLERtar,i is the target BLER of the i:th transmission channel.
Stepi is the adjustment step of the i:th transmission channel.
Factor is the adjustment factor.
329
Uplink Outer Loop Power Control Parameters

z
OPLC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PCSWITCH (Power control algorithm

switch) parameter.
The default value is 1, namely ON
INITSIRTARGET
Parameter name: Initial SIR target value
The recommended value is shown in following table.
Page67
OPLC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PCSWITCH (Power control algorithm switch) parameter.
Comments: When it is checked, RNC updates the uplink SIR TARGET of RLs
on the NodeB side by Iub DCH FP signals
Default value: 1

INITSIRTARGET
Parameter name: Initial SIR target value
Physical value range: -8.2 to +17.3 dB, step 0.1
Content: Defining the initial SIR target value of outer loop power control.
Recommended value: refer to the following table.
Set this parameter through ADD TYPSRBOLPC / ADD TYPRABOLPC, query it

through LST TYPSRB / LST TYPRAB, and modify it through MOD
TYPSRBOLPC / MOD TYPRABOLPC
330

z
SIRADJUSTPERIOD
Parameter name: OLPC adjustment period
SIRADJUSTFACTOR
Parameter name: SIR adjustment coefficient
The recommended value is 10, namely 1
SIRADJUSTPERIOD
Parameter name: OLPC adjustment period.
Physical value range: 10 to 1000 ms, step 10
Page68
Comments: Outer loop power control varies with radio environment. A fast
changing radio environment leads to a shorter outer loop power control
adjustment period, while a slower changing one makes the period longer.
Default value: 40
SIRADJUSTFACTOR
Parameter name: SIR adjustment coefficient
Physical value range: 0.1 to 1 , step: 0.1
Content: It is used to adjust the best OLPC step for different cells when the
OLPC algorithm is given.
Recommended value: 10, namely 1
Set this parameter through SET OPLC / ADD CELLOLPC, query it through LST
OPLC, and modify it through SET OPLC / MOD CELLOLPC
331

z
BLERQUALITY
Parameter name: Service DCH_BLER target value
SIRADJUSTSTEP
Parameter name: SIR adjustment step
The recommended value is shown in the following table.
SIRADJUSTSTEP
Parameter name: SIR adjustment step
Physical value range: 0 to 10 , step: 0.001dB
Content: Step of target SIR adjustment in outer loop power control algorithm.
Page69

through LST TYPSRB / LST TYPRAB ,and modify it through MOD
BLERQUALITY
Parameter name: Service DCH_BLER target value
Physical value range: 510-7 to 1
Content: This QoS-related parameter is used by CRNC to decide the target SIR
value that influences access and power control. Use the formula below to get the
integer value of the parameter: 10Log 10(BLER).
332

z
Service
SRB
3.4k
SRB
13.6k
AMR
12.2k
CSD
64k
PS I/B
8k
PS I/B
16k
PS I/B
32k
PS I/B
64k
PS I/B
128k
PS I/B
144k
PS I/B
256k
PS I/B
384k
SIR init
target value
102
122
102
122
102
102
102
102
102
107
122
142
OLPC
adjustment
period
Service
DCH_BLER
target value
-20
-20
-20
-27
-20
-20
-20
-20
-20
-20
-20
-20
SIR
adjustment
step
10
Page70
Where,
CSD: CS domain Data service
I/B: Interactive and Background.
333

z
The parameters MaxSirStepUp and MaxSirStepDown limit the

adjustment range of the SIRtar , and the algorithm is:
If SIRtar > 0 and SIRtar > MaxSirStepUp ,

then SIRtar (n+1) = SIRtar (n) + MaxSirStepUp
If SIRtar < 0 and ABS( SIRtar ) > MaxSirStepDown ,

then SIRtar (n+1) = SIRtar (n) MaxSirStepDown
The parameters MaxSirtarget and MinSirtarget limit the range of

the SIRtar at any time.
Page71
Where,
SIRtar is the adjustment of SIRtar, and SIRtar = SIRtar (n+1) - SIRtar (n)
ABS( SIRtar ) means absolute value of SIRtar
334

z
MAXSIRSTEPUP / MAXSIRSTEPDN
Parameter name: Maximum SIR increase / decrease step
MAXSIRTARGET / MINSIRTARGET
Parameter name: Maximum / Minimum SIR target
MAXSIRSTEPUP / MAXSIRSTEPDN
Parameter name: Maximum SIR increase / decrease step
Page72
Content: Maximum allowed SIR increase/ decrease step within an outer loop
power control adjustment period.
MAXSIRTARGET / MINSIRTARGET
Parameter name: Maximum / Minimum SIR target
Physical value range: -8.2 to17.3 dB, step: 0.1
Content: Define the maximum /minimum SIR target value of outer loop power
control algorithm.
335

z
Service
SRB
3.4k
SRB
13.6k
AMR
12.2k
CSD
64k
PS I/B
8k
PS I/B
16k
PS I/B
32k
PS I/B
64k
PS I/B
128k
PS I/B
144k
PS I/B
256k
PS I/B
384k
Maximum
SIR increase
step
400
500
500
1000
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
Maximum
SIR decrease
step
200
200
200
100
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Maximum
SIR target
132
132
132
152
132
132
132
132
132
137
152
172
Minimum SIR
target
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
Page73
Where,
CSD: CS domain Data service
I/B: Interactive and Background.
336
Downlink Outer Loop Power Control

Measure BLER of
received data and
compare with the
BLERtar
L3
Outer loop
set SIRtar
Inner loop
L1
NodeB
Transmit TPC
Measure SIR and

compare with SIRtar
UE
Page74
The downlink outer loop power control is implemented inside the UE. Therefore, this
algorithm is specified by UE manufacturer.
Generally, the UE L3 measures the received BLER and compares it with the BLERtar. If
the BLERmea is greater than the BLERtar, the L3 increases the SIRtar and send it to UE
L1; otherwise, the L3 decreases the SIRtar.
337
Summary
z
In this course, we have discussed function, principle and

common parameters of the following power control
algorithm:
Open loop power control
Inner loop power control
Outer loop power control
Page75
338
Thank you
www.huawei.com
339
WCDMA Handover
Principle and
Relevant Parameters
www.huawei.com
66
Foreword
z
Why mobile system need handover?
The mobility of UE
Load Balance
Any others ?
Page1
Handover is a basic function of a cellular mobile network. The purpose of handover is

to ensure that a UE in CELL_DCH state is served continuously when it moves.
HCS: hierarchical cell structure
67
Handover types supported by UMTS
68
Objectives
z
Know the features of each handover
Know the algorithms of handover
Know the handover procedure
Know the parameters of handover
Page3
Handover types supported by UMTS can be classified as:
Intra-frequency handover
Inter-frequency handover
Inter-RAT handover
69
The Basic Concepts of Handover

z
Active Set
Maximum Ratio Combination
Monitored Set
Selective Combination
Detected Set
Soft Handover Gain
Radio Link (RL)
P-CPICH
Radio Link Set (RLS)
Page4
Active set : Cells, which belong to the active set. User information is sent from all these cells.
In FDD, the cells in the active set are involved in soft handover. The UE shall only consider
active set cells included in the variable CELL_INFO_LIST for measurement; i.e. active set cells
not included in the CELL_INFO_LIST shall not be considered in any event evaluation and
measurement reporting.
Monitored set :Cells, which are not included in the active set, but are included in the
CELL_INFO_LIST belong to the monitored set.
Detected set : Cells detected by the UE, which are neither in the CELL_INFO_LIST nor in the
active set belong to the detected set. Reporting of measurements of the detected set is only
applicable to intra-frequency measurements made by UEs in CELL_DCH state.
RL: Radio link between NodeB and UE.
RLS: Radio link set. The RLs from same NodeB.
Combination way: For soft handover, the uplink signals are combined in RNC. The RNC will
select one best signal to process. We call this selective combination. For softer handover, the
uplink signals are combined in the RAKE receiver of NodeB. It is maximum ratio combination.
Soft handover gain: We have introduced in Coverage Planning.
CPICH: Common Pilot Channel. UE measure the signal strength of CPICH for handover
decision.
70
Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
2. Inter-Frequency Handover
3. Inter-RAT Handover
Page5
71
Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview
2. Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure
3. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover
Page6
72
Intra-Frequency Handover Overview

Characters of Intra-Frequency Handover:
z
The carrier frequencies of the current cell and target cell are the same
Intra-frequency soft handover
Intra-frequency hard handover.
Page7
Intra-frequency handover consists of two types,
Intra-frequency soft handover: more than one radio link are set up for the UE.
Intra-frequency hard handover: only one radio link is set up for the UE.
Intra-frequency soft handover is more commonly used than intra-frequency hard

handover. Intra-frequency hard handover is used only in some special scenarios, for
example, when there is no Iur interface between two RNCs.
73

Comparison between soft handover and hard handover:
Item
The number of RLs in
Soft Handover
Hard Handover
Several
One
No
Yes
Only happened
Can be happened in Intra-
between Intra-
frequency cells or Inter-frequency
frequency cells
cells
active set after handover

Interruption during
handover
The frequencies of cells
Page8
The maximum number of RL is 3. This value can be changed. But this function need
the UE to support. Normally, the active set supported by UE is fixed 3 and can not be
changed.
74

Intra-Frequency Soft Handover :
z
Soft Handover
Softer Handover
Page9
Intra-Frequency soft handover is a function in which the UE is connected to several

cells at the same time. Addition or release of radio links are controlled by the ACTIVE
SET UPDATE procedure.
During soft handover, a UE is in the overlapping cell coverage area of two sectors
belonging to different base stations. The communications between UE and base
station take place concurrently via two air interface channels from each base station
separately.
During softer handover, a UE is in the overlapping cell coverage area of two adjacent
sectors of a base station. The communications between UE and base station take
place concurrently via two air interface channels, one for each sector separately.
75

Comparison between soft handover and softer handover :
Item
Scenario
Uplink
Softer Handover
Soft Handover
When the UE is in the overlapped
When the UE is in the overlapped
coverage area of two neighboring
coverage area of two neighboring
cells of a NodeB with combined RLs
cells of different NodeBs
Using maximum-ratio combination
Using selection combination
Occupying less Iub bandwidth
Occupying more Iub bandwidth
signal
Downlink
signal
Resource
use
Page10
During softer handover, the uplink signaling are combined in

NodeB by maximum ratio combination, but during soft
handover they are combined in RNC by selective
combination
Compare to later one, the maximum ratio combination can

get more gain. So the performance of maximum ratio
combination is better
Since softer handover is completed in NodeB, it do not

consume transport resource of Iub
76

Intra-Frequency Hard Handover :
z
No Iur interface
Iur interface is congested
High-speed Best Effort (BE) service Handover
Soft handover fails
Page11
Intra-frequency hard handover refers to a handover where all the old radio links are
released before the new radio links are established. Compared with soft handover,
intra-frequency hard handover uses fewer resources.
The scenarios of intra-frequency hard handover are as follows:
The UE needs to perform the intra-frequency handover between two

cells configured in different RNCs. No Iur interface is present between
RNCs.
The UE needs to perform the intra-frequency handover between two

cells configured in different RNCs. The Iur interface is congested
between RNCs.
There is a high-speed Best Effort (BE) service.
Compared with soft handover, intra-frequency hard handover is used to

save downlink bandwidth for a high-speed BE service.
The intra-frequency soft handover fails and intra-frequency hard
handover is allowed.
When intra-frequency soft handover fails because of a congestion problem of the
target cell, the RNC tries an intra-frequency hard handover with a lower service bit
rate.
The INTRA_FREQUENCY_HARD_HANDOVER_SWITCH parameter in the SET
CORRMALGOSWITCH command is used to determine whether to enable intrafrequency hard handover. By default, this switch is ON.
77
Contents
Page12
78
Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

The following figure shows handover
procedure
Measure the CPICH Ec/N0 of the serving cell and

its neighboring cells as well as the relative time
difference between the cells
Measurement
Measurement phase
Decision
No
Are handover criteria satisfied?
Yes
Execution
Perform a handover and update relative parameters
Decision phase
Execution phase
Page13
Intra-frequency handover procedure is divided into three phases: handover

measurement, handover decision, and handover execution.
After the UE transits to CELL_DCH state in connected mode during a call, the RNC
sends a measurement control message to instruct the UE to take measurements and
report the measurement event results.
Upon receiving an event report from the UE, the RNC makes a handover decision
and performs the corresponding handover
79
Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement
2. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution
3. Neighboring Cell Combination Algorithm
Page14
80
Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement

MEASUREMENT CONTROL
UE
UTRAN
MEASUREMENT CONTROL
Page15
The measurement control message carries the following information:
Event trigger threshold
Hysteresis value
Event trigger delay time
Neighboring cell list
81

MEASUREMENT REPORT
UE
UTRAN
MEASUREMENT REPORT
Page16
The purpose of the measurement reporting procedure is to transfer

measurement results from the UE to UTRAN.
z
Based on the algorithm in measurement control, the UE will measure the
signal strength or quality and check if it meet the requirement of all event. If it
meet the requirement of any event, UE will send the measurement report to
UTRAN to trigger the handover. The most important information in the
measurement are the PSC , the CPICH Ec/No of the target cell, and the
triggered event.
82

z
L3 Filtering for Intra-Frequency Handover
The value after L3 filtering procedure is calculated according to following formula:

Fn = (1 - ) x Fn-1 + x Mn
where
Fn is the new measurement value obtained after L3 filtering.
Fn-1 is the last measurement value obtained after L3 filtering.
Mn is the latest measurement value obtained from the physical layer.
= 1/2(k/2) (k is set to Intra-freq meas L3 filter coeff)
When is set to 1, that is, k = 0, no L3 filtering is performed.
Page17
A is measurement value at the physical layer
B is the measurement value after layer 1 filtering at physical layer. The value goes from the
physical layer to high layer
C is measurement after processing in the layer3 filter
C is another measurement value
D is measurement report information sent on the radio interface or Iub interface
83
Key parameters of Intra-frequency Measurement

z
Intra-freq Measure Quantity
Parameter ID: IntraFreqMeasQuantity
The default value of this parameter is CPICH_Ec/No
Intra-freq meas L3 filter coeff
Parameter ID: FilterCoef
The default value of this parameter is 3
Page18
The measurement quantity of intra-frequency handover can be Common Pilot

Channel (CPICH) Ec/No or CPICH Received Signal Code Power (RSCP). It can
be used in all the measurement events of intra-frequency handover
zIntra-freq
Measure Quantity
Parameter ID: IntraFreqMeasQuantity
Value range: CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP
Content: This parameter specifies the measurement quantity used in intrafrequency measurement.
The default value of this parameter is CPICH_Ec/No
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO/ADD

CELLINTRAFREQHO/MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO .
Before judging a measurement event and sending the measurement report, the
UE performs L3 filtering for the measurement value.
zIntra-freq
meas L3 filter coeff
Parameter ID: FilterCoef
Value range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19
Content: This parameter specifies the intra-frequency measurement L3 filter

coefficient. The greater this value is set, the greater the smoothing effect and
the higher the anti-fast fading capability are, but the lower the signal change
tracing capability is.

84
Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement Events

Event
1A
Description
The PCPICH quality or strength of the cells in the monitored set
enters the reporting range . This indicates that the cell is close to
the best cell . A relative high combined gain can be achieved when
the cell is added to the active set
1B
The PCPICH quality or strength of the cells in the active set leaves
the reporting range. This indicates that a cell is much worse than
the quality of the best cell. The cell should not stay in the active set
1C
A non-active PCPICH becomes better than an active PCPICH. This

indicates that the quality or strength of a cell is close to the best cell.
In addition ,the number of cells in the active set has reached the
maximum value. The cell replaces the worst cell in the active set ;
thus achieving a higher combined gain
1D
Event of the change of the best cell
1J
RAN10.0 provides the solution to the issue of how to add an

HSUPA cell in a DCH active set to an E-DCH active set. Event 1J
is added to the 3GPP protocol. This event is triggered when a nonactive E-DCH but active DCH primary CPICH becomes better than
an active E-DCH primary CPICH.
85

1A EVENT
Event 1A is triggered on the basis of the following formula
NA
M New + CIONew W M i + (1 W ) M Best ( R1a H1a / 2)

i =1
Page20
MNew is the measurement value of the cell in the reporting range.
CIONew is equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and
Neighboring cell oriented CIO, which is the offset between the cell in the
reporting range and the best cell in the active set.
W represents Weighted factor, used to weight the quality of the active set.
Mi is the measurement value of a cell in the active set.
NA is the number of cells not forbidden to affect the reporting range in the
active set.
MBest is the measurement value of the best cell in the active set.
R1a is the reporting range or the relative threshold of soft handover. The
threshold parameters of the CS non-VP service, VP service, and PS service
are as follows:
CS non VP service 1A event relative THD
VP service 1A event relative THD
PS service 1A event relative threshold

H1a represents 1A hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 1A.
86

1A EVENT
A: signal curve of the best cell in the active set

B: signal curve of a cell in the monitoring set
C: Th1A curve
Page21
If the signal quality of a cell that is not in the active set is higher than Th1A for a period of time
specified by 1A event trigger delay time (that is, Time to trigger in the figure), the UE reports
event 1A
87
Parameters of Intra-Frequency Handover

z
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP
The default value of this parameter is 6 ( 3dB )
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP
PS service 1A event relative threshold
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1APS
Page22
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP
Value range: 0~14.5; step: 0.5
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold of event 1A for the CS non-VP
service. The larger the parameter value is, the more easily event 1A is triggered..
The default value of this parameter is 6 (3dB)
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO/ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO/MOD

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold of event 1A for the VP service.
The larger the parameter value is, the more easily event 1A is triggered..

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
PS service 1A event relative THD
Content: This parameter specifies the PS service relative threshold of event 1A. The
smaller the parameter value is, the more easily event 1A is triggered.

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
88

Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset
Parameter ID: CIO
The default value of this parameter is 0 (0dB )
Neighboring cell oriented CIO
Parameter ID: CIOOffset
Page23
Parameter ID: CIO
Value range: -10
to +10
parameter is used together with Neighboring cell

oriented CIO. The sum of the two parameter values is added to the
measurement quantity before the UE evaluates whether an event
occurred. In handover algorithms, this parameter is used for moving
the border of a cell.
Content: This
Set this parameter through ADD
CELLSETUP/MOD CELLSETUP
Neighboring cell oriented CIO
Value range: -10
to +10
Content: This
parameter is used together with Cell oriented Cell Individual

Offset. The sum of the two parameter values is added to the measurement
quantity before the UE evaluates whether an event has occurred. In handover
algorithms, this parameter is used for moving the border of 2 neighbors.
Set this parameter through ADD
INTRAFREQNCELL/MOD INTRAFREQNCELL
89

z
1A hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1A
1A event trigger delay time
Parameter ID: TrigTime1A
The default value of this parameter is D320 ( 320ms )
Weighted factor
Parameter ID: Weight
Page24
1A hysteresis
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event 1A. It is related to the
slow fading characteristic.
CELLINTRAFREQHO .

Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000
ms
Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of event 1A. It is related to the
slow fading characteristic. The greater the parameter value, the smaller the probability of
misjudgment, but the slower the response of event reporting, triggered by measured signal
changes.
The recommended value of this parameter is D320 ( 320ms )

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
zWeighted factor
Parameter ID: Weight
Value range: 0~20,step:0.1
Content: This parameter is used to define the soft handover relative threshold based on
the measured value of each cell in the active set. The greater the parameter value, the
higher the soft handover relative threshold. When this value is set to 0, the soft handover
relative threshold is determined only by the best cell in the active set. .
The Default Value of this parameter is 0

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
90

1A Event Report Mode:
z
Event Trigger Report
Event to Periodical Report
Page25
The report mode of 1A is Event Trigger Report .

Generally the event 1A is reported only once. However, to avoid measurement report
loss, the event 1A reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
91

1A event to periodical rpt period
Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1A
The default value of this parameter is D4000 (4000 ms )
1A event to periodical rpt number
Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1A
The default value of this parameter is D16
Page26
1A event to periodical rpt period
Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1A
Value range: NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000,
D4000, D8000, D16000
Content: The reporting period for the event 1A. Generally the event 1A is
reported only once. However, to avoid measurement report loss, the event 1A
reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
The default value of this parameter is D4000 (4000 ms)
1A event to periodical rpt number
Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1A
Value range: D1, D2, D4, D8, D16, D32, D64, infinity
Content: The periodical reporting times for the event 1A. When the actual
times exceed this parameter, the periodical reporting comes to an end.
The recommended value of this parameter is D16

92

1B EVENT
Event 1B is triggered on the basis of the following formula
M Old + CIOOld
NA
W M i + (1 W ) M Best ( R1b + H1b / 2),

i =1
Page27
MOld is the measurement value of the cell that becomes worse.
CIOOld is equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and
Neighboring cell oriented CIO, which is the offset between the cell in the
reporting range and the best cell in the active set.
W represents Weighted factor, used to weight the quality of the active set.
Mi is the measurement value of the cell in the active set.
NA is the number of cells not forbidden to affect the reporting range in the
active set. MBest is the measurement value of the best cell in the active set.
R1b is the reporting range or the relative threshold of soft handover. The
threshold parameters of the CS non-VP service, VP service, and PS services
are as follows:
CS non VP service 1B event relative THD
VP service 1B event relative THD
PS service 1B event relative threshold

H1b represents 1B hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 1B.
93

1B EVENT

B: signal curve of a cell in the monitoring set
C: Th1B curve
Page28
If the signal quality of a cell in the active set is lower than Th1B curve for a period of
time specified by 1B event trigger delay time (Time to trigger in the figure), the UE
reports event 1B
94

Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP
PS service 1B event relative threshold
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BPS
Page29
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold of event 1B for the CS nonVP service. The smaller the parameter value is, the more easily event 1B is triggered .

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
Parameter ID: IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold of event 1A for the VP
service. The smaller the parameter value is, the more easily event 1B is triggered .

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
PS service 1A event relative THD
Content: This parameter specifies the PS service relative threshold of event 1A. The
smaller the parameter value is, the more easily event 1B is triggered .

CELLINTRAFREQHO .
95
Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover
1B hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1B
1B event trigger delay time
Parameter ID: TrigTime1B
Page30
1B hysteresis
Content: This
parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event 1B. It is related

to the slow fading characteristic.

Parameter ID: TrigTime1B
Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560,
5000 ms
Content: This
parameter specifies the trigger delay time of event 1B. It is

related to the slow fading characteristic. The greater the parameter value, the
smaller the probability of misjudgment, but the slower the response of event
reporting, triggered by measured signal changes.
INTRAFREQHO/ADD
Set this parameter through SET
96

1C EVENT
Event 1C is triggered on the basis of the following formula
M New + CIONew M InAS + CIOInAS + H1c / 2,
Page31
MNew is the measurement value of the cell in the reporting range.
CIONew is the cell individual offset value of the cell in the reporting range. It is
equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neighboring
cell oriented CIO, which is the offset between the cell in the reporting range
and the best cell in the active set.
MInAS is the measurement value of the worst cell in the active set.
CIOInAS is the cell individual offset value of the worst cell in the active set. It is
equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neighboring
cell oriented CIO.
H1c represents 1C hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 1C.
97

1C EVENT

B: signal curve of a cell in the active set
C: signal curve of the worst cell in the active set
D: signal curve of a cell in the monitoring set
E: Th1C curve
Page32
If the signal quality of a cell not in the active set is higher than Th1C for a period of time
specified by 1C event trigger delay time (Time to trigger in the figure), the UE
reports event 1C
98

z
1C hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1C
1C event trigger delay time
Parameter ID: TrigTime1C
Page33
1C hysteresis
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event
1C. It is related to the slow fading characteristic.

Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320,
640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ms
Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of
event 1C. It is related to the slow fading characteristic. The
greater the parameter value, the smaller the probability of
misjudgment, but the slower the response of event reporting,
triggered by measured signal changes.
99

1C Event Report Mode:
z
Page34
The report mode of 1C is Event Trigger Report .

Generally the event 1C is reported only once. However, to avoid measurement report
loss, the event 1C reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
100

1C event to periodical rpt period
Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1C
1C event to periodical rpt number
Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1C
Page35
1C event to periodical rpt period
Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1C
Value range: NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000,
D4000, D8000, D16000
Content: The reporting period for the event 1C. Generally the event 1C is
reported only once. However, to avoid measurement report loss, the event 1C
reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
1C event to periodical rpt number
Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1C
Value range: D1, D2, D4, D8, D16, D32, D64, infinity
Content: The periodical reporting times for the event 1C. When the actual
times exceed this parameter, the periodical reporting comes to an end.
The recommended value of this parameter is D16

101

1D EVENT
Event 1D is triggered on the basis of the following formula
M Notbest 10 M Best + H1d / 2,
Page36
MNotBest is the measurement value of a cell that is not in the list of the
best cells.
MBest is the measurement value of the best cell in the active set.
H1d represents 1D hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 1D.
102

1D Event

B: signal curve of a cell in the active set or monitoring set
C: Th1D curve
Page37
If the signal quality of a cell not in the active set is higher than Th1D for a
period of time specified by 1D event trigger delay time (Time to trigger in the
figure), the UE reports event 1D
103

z
1D hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1D
1D event trigger delay time
Parameter ID: TrigTime1D
Page38
1D hysteresis
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event
1D. It is related to the slow fading characteristic.

Parameter ID: TrigTime1D
Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320,
640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ms
Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of
event 1D. It is related to the slow fading characteristic. The
greater the parameter value, the smaller the probability of
misjudgment, but the slower the response of event reporting,
triggered by measured signal changes.
104

1J EVENT
Event 1J is triggered on the basis of the following formula
M New + CIONew M InAS + CIOInAS + H1J / 2,
Page39
Reporting event 1J: A non-active E-DCH but active DCH primary CPICH becomes better than
an active E-DCH primary CPICH
MNew is the measurement result of the cell not included in the E-DCH active set but included in
DCH active set.
CIONew is the individual cell offset for the cell not included in the E-DCH active set but included
in DCH active set becoming better than the cell in the E-DCH active set if an individual cell
offset is stored for that cell. Otherwise, it equals 0.
MInAS is the measurement result of the cell in the E-DCH active set with the lowest
measurement result.
CIOInAS is the individual cell offset for the cell in the E-DCH active set that is becoming worse
than the new cell.
H1J is the hysteresis parameter for event 1J.
105

1J Event
A: signal quality curve of a cell in the E-DCH active set

B: signal quality curve of the worst cell in the E-DCH active set
C: signal quality curve of a cell not in the E-DCH active set but included in DCH active set
D: signal quality curve of a cell not in the E-DCH active set but included in DCH active set
In the figure, the hysteresis and the cell individual offsets for all cells equal 0
Page40
The first measurement report is sent when primary CPICH D becomes better than primary
CPICH B. The "cell measurement event result" of the measurement report contains the
information of primary CPICH D and CPICH B.
On the assumption that the E-DCH active set has been updated after the first measurement
report (E-DCH active set is now primary CPICH A and primary CPICH D), the second report is
sent when primary CPICH C becomes better than primary CPICH A. The "cell measurement
event result" of the second measurement report contains the information of primary CPICH C
and primary CPICH A.
The parameters described in the following need to be set on the RNC LMT:
1J hysteresis
1J event trigger delay time
1J event to periodical rpt number
1J event to periodical rpt period
106

z
1J Event function
3GPP define the maximum DCH active set size is 6 and the maximum
E-DCH active set size is 4
The DCH active set covers the E-DCH active set or they are the same
The best cell in E-DCH active set should be the same as that in DCH
active set
Uplink channel type of UE is decided by the best cell in DCH active

set
Uplink channel is E-DCH if the best cell in DCH active set supports HSUPA
Uplink channel is DCH if the best cell in DCH active set can NOT support
HSUPA
Page41
107

z
Processing procedure for 1J Event
The UE reports 1J Event if it find a non-active E-DCH but active DCH

cell PCICH becomes better than an active E-DCH PCIPCH
RNC will add the target cell into E-DCH active set if the E-DCH active set is
NOT full
RNC will perform replace procedure if the E-DCH active set is full
Page42
108

1J hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1J
1J event trigger delay time
Parameter ID: TrigTime1J
Max number of cell in edch active cell
Parameter ID: MAXEDCHCELLINACTIVESET
z1J
Page43
hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor1J

Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event 1J. It
is related to the slow fading characteristic.
z1J
event trigger delay time

Parameter ID: TrigTime1J
Value range: 0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640,
1280, 2560, 5000 ms
Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of event 1D.
It is related to the slow fading characteristic.
zMax
number of cell in edch active cell

Parameter ID: MAXEDCHCELLINACTIVESET
Value range: 1 to 4
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of cells in
the E-DCH active set.
The recommended value of this parameter is 3
Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM .
109

z
1A Event Report Mode:
Parameters
Parameter ID: ReportIntervalfor1J
Parameter ID: PeriodMRReportNumfor1J
Page44
The report mode of 1J is Event Trigger Report .

Generally the event 1J is reported only once. However, to avoid measurement
report loss, the event 1J reporting can be turned to periodical reporting.
z

CELLINTRAFREQHO/MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO

110
Contents
Page45
111
Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

RNC will make decision and execute handover depends on the
Events the RNC receives.
z
1A Event
1B Event
1C Event
1D Event
1J Event
Event
Page46
Decision and Execution
1A
When receiving an event 1A report, the RNC decides whether to add a

cell.
For event 1A, the UE can report more than one cell in the event list in
one measurement report. These cells are in the list of the Measurement
Control message, and they are sequenced in descending order by
measurement quantity.
For the cells in the list, the RNC adds the radio link to the active set only
if the number of cells in the active set does not reach the maximum value.
1B
When receiving an event 1B report, the RNC determines whether to

delete a cell.
1C
When receiving an event 1C report, the RNC decides whether to change

the worst cell.
For event 1C, the UE reports a list that contains good cells and the cells
to be replaced, and sequences the cells in descending order by
measurement quantity.
After receiving the list from the UE, the RNC replaces the bad cells in the
active set with the good cells in the list.
112
When receiving an event 1D report, which includes information about only

one cell, the RNC learns that the quality of this cell is better than that of the
serving cell and takes one of the following actions:
If the reported cell is in the active set, the RNC decides whether to change
the best cell or reconfigure measurement control.
If the reported cell is in the monitored set,
If the number of cells in the active set has not reached the
maximum value, the RNC decides a soft handover and adds the
cell to the active set.
If the number of cells in the active set has reached the maximum
value, the RNC decides a soft handover and replaces the worst cell
in the active set with the reported cell.
The RNC determines whether the intra-frequency hard handover scenarios
are applicable. For detailed information, see 3.1 Intra-Frequency Handover
Types. If any scenario is applicable, the RNC performs an intra-frequency
hard handover.
1D
When receiving an event 1J report with information about the good cells
and the cells to be replaced, the RNC proceeds as follows:
If the current number of cells in the E-DCH active set is less than the value
of Max number of cell in edch active set, the uplink of the cell where
event 1J is triggered is reconfigured to E-DCH.
If the current number of cells in the E-DCH active set is equal to the value
of Max number of cell in edch active set, the RNC searches the
measurement report for the non-serving Cell_EDCH with the lowest
measured quality in the E-DCH active set. Then, the uplink of the cell
where event 1J is triggered is reconfigured from DCH to E-DCH, and
the uplink of CELL-EDCH is reconfigured from E-DCH to DCH.
1J
113

When make decision, RNC must follow these restrictions
z
Max number of cell in active set
Parameter ID: MaxCellInActiveSet
Minimum Quality Threshold for SHO
Parameter ID: SHOQualmin
The default value of this parameter is -24 ( -24dB)
Page48
Max number of cell in active set

Parameter ID: MaxCellInActiveSet
Value range: 1~6;

Content: This parameter specifies the Max number of cell in
active set.

Minimum Quality Threshold for SHO
Parameter ID: SHOQualmin

Value range: -24~0,step:1dB
Content: This parameter specifies the minimum quality

threshold for soft handover..
The recommended value of this parameter is -24 (-24dB)

114
Rate Reduction After an SHO Failure

z
For R99 NRT services to increase the probability of a successful soft

handover, the rate reduction is triggered after a admission failure
1A,1C,1D is received by RNC
Execute admission control in target cell
Admission succeed?
Rate Reduction
Execute Handover
Page49
If the RNC receives a 1A, 1C, or 1D measurement report, the

corresponding cell tries to admit the UE. If the cell fails to admit
the UE, the RNC performs the estimation procedure for rate
reduction.
115
Rate Reduction After an SHO Failure
procedure for rate reduction
Estimation
Execution
Page50
116
Estimation Procedure for Rate Reduction
117
The estimation procedure after the cell fails to admit the UE is described as follows:
z
Step 1 : The RNC evaluates whether the measurement quantity of the cell failing
to be admitted meets the condition of rate reduction.
If the condition is met, the RNC performs a rate reduction process for the
handover service immediately.
If the condition is not met, the RNC performs Step2.
The condition of rate reduction is as follows:
Mnew > Mbest_cell - RelThdForDwnGrd
where
Mnew is the CPICH Ec/No measurement value of the cell failing to be admitted.
Mbest_cell is the CPICH Ec/No measurement value of the best cell in the active
set.
RelThdForDwnGrd is configured through the parameter Relative threshold of
SHO failure.
Step 2 :The RNC evaluates whether the number of SHO failures in the cell
exceeds the Threshold number of SHO failure.
If the number of SHO failures in the cell is smaller than the Threshold number
of SHO failure, the RNC determines whether the SHO failure evaluation timer
has been started:
If the timer has not been started, the RNC starts it.
If the timer has been started, the RNC increments the SHO failure
counter by one.
Before the SHO failure evaluation timer expires, no action is taken

and the RNC waits for the next measurement report period.
When the SHO failure evaluation timer expires, the RNC sets the SHO failure
counter of the corresponding cell to 0 and ends the evaluation.
If the number of SHO failures in the cell is larger than or equal to the
Threshold number of SHO failure, the RNC performs a rate reduction
process for the access service and sets the SHO failure counter of the
corresponding cell to 0.
118

z
Relative threshold of SHO failure
Parameter ID: RelThdForDwnGrd
Max evaluation period of SHO failure
Parameter ID: ShoFailPeriod
The default value of this parameter is 60 ( 60s )
Threshold number of SHO failure
Parameter ID: ShoFailNumForDwnGrd
Page53
Relative threshold of SHO failure

Parameter ID: RelThdForDwnGrd
Value range: -29 to +29 ; step: 0.5 dB
Content: This parameter specifies the relative threshold for direct rate reduction after an SHO
failure. If the difference between the signal quality of the target cell to which an SHO fails and that
of the best cell is lower than this relative threshold, the RNC directly initiates a rate reduction
process in the active set, regardless of the limitation on the number of SHO failures.
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO.
Max evaluation period of SHO failure
Parameter ID: ShoFailPeriod
Value range: 0~120s
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum evaluation period of SHO failures for rate
reduction. During the evaluation period, the RNC records the number of SHO failures in at most
three cells for each UE. After the evaluation period, the RNC clears this record.
The recommended value of this parameter is 60 ( 60s )
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO
zThreshold number of SHO failure
Parameter ID: ShoFailNumForDwnGrd
Value range: 0~63
Content: This parameter specifies the threshold number of SHO failures for rate reduction. If the
number of SHO failures in a cell reaches or exceeds this threshold during the period specified by
Max evaluation period of SHO failure, the RNC performs a rate reduction process in the active
set. After the rate reduction succeeds, the RNC initiates an SHO in the cell.
The recommended value of this parameter is 3
z
119
Execution Procedure of Rate Reduction
The rate reduction execution procedure is :

z
Step1The RNC performs a rate reduction process for the

access service.
Step2After the rate reduction succeeds, the RNC immediately

attempts to add this cell to the active set without measurement:
If the cell succeeds in admitting the UE, the

RNC adds the radio link and sets the SHO
failure counter of the cell to 0 and ends the
execution.
If the cell fails to admit the UE, the RNC starts

the Period of penalty timer for SHO failure
after down rate to avoid an increase in the rate
triggered by DCCC within the period. Also in this
period, the RNC sets the SHO failure counter of
the cell to 0 and ends the execution.
If fails to perform a soft handover again, RNC performs the
estimation procedure and the execution procedure, as

previously described.
120
Parameters of Rate Reduction Execution

z
Period of penalty timer for SHO failure after down rate
Parameter ID: DcccShoPenaltyTime
The default value of this parameter is 30 ( 30s )
Page55
Period of penalty timer for SHO failure after down rate

Parameter ID: DcccShoPenaltyTime
Value range: 0 to 255 ; step: 1 s
Content: If an SHO fails again after the rate reduction, the RNC is forbidden to increase the rate
during the period specified by this parameter.
The default value of this parameter is 30 ( 30s)
Set this parameter through SET INTRAFREQHO.
121
Contents
1. Intra-Frequency handover Overview
Page56
122
Neighboring Cell Combination Algorithm

z
When the UE is in soft handover state
The combined neighboring cell list is affect by :
Intra-frequency neighboring cells
Repeat times
Inter-frequency neighboring cells
Serving cell signal quality (Ec/No) order
Inter-RAT neighboring cells
Neighboring cell priority
Page57
After obtaining the intra-frequency neighboring cells of each cell in the active set, the RNC calculates
the union neighboring cell set of the intra-frequency cells, which is also referred as Sall, by using the
following method. This method can also be used to generate the Sall of inter-frequency or inter-RAT
cells.
1,The intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells of each cell in the current
active set are obtained.
2,The RNC sequences the cells in the active set in descending order of CPICH Ec/No according to
the latest measurement report (event 1A, 1B, 1C, or 1D) from the UE. The best cell is based on
event 1D, whereas other cells are based on the latest measurement report.
3,The cells in the active set are added to Sall.
4,The neighboring cells of the best cell in the active set are added to Sall. The priority of neighbor
cell, which are set for each neighboring cell, are used to change the order of adding the
neighboring cells to Sall.
5,The neighboring cells of other cells in the active set are added to Sall in descending order by
CPICH Ec/No values of these cells in the active set. The neighboring cells of the same cell in
the active set are added according to The priority of neighbor cell and repeated number of
repeated neighboring cell is recorded.
6,If there are more than 32 neighboring cells in Sall, delete the neighboring cells whose repeat
number in Sall is less. The top 32 neighboring cells are grouped into the final Sall.
If The flag of the priority is switched to FALSE, The priority of neighbor cell is cleared.
If The flag of the priority is switched to TRUE, The priority of neighbor cell is set
simultaneously.
123
Parameters of Neighboring Cell Combination Algorithm

Neighboring Cell Combination Switch
Parameter ID: NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH
The default value of this parameter is OFF
The flag of the priority
Parameter ID: NPrioFlag
The default value of this parameter is FALSE
The priority of neighbor cell
Parameter ID: NPrio
The default value of this parameter is None
Page58
The NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH of Handover Algorithm Switch parameter

decides the measurement range of neighboring cells
If the switch is set to ON, measurement objects are chosen from the
neighboring cells of all the cells in the active set.
If the switch is set to OFF, measurement objects are chosen from the
neighboring cells of the best cell.
But, limited by the 3GPP, the maximum number of neighboring cells is 32. So if
the NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH is ON, it very possible that the neighboring
cell of all the cells in the active set may exceed 32.
By the Neighboring Cell Combination Algorithm , RNC will choose 32 neighboring
cell for measurement.
z
Neighboring Cell Combination Switch
Parameter ID: NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH
Value range: OFF, ON
Content: If the switch is set to ON, measurement objects are chosen from the
neighboring cells of all the cells in the active set.If the switch is set to OFF,
measurement objects are chosen from the neighboring cells of the best cell.
Set this parameter through SET CORRMALGOSWITCH
124
The flag of the priority
Parameter ID: NPrioFlag
Value range: FALSE, TRUE
Content:
FALSE: The priority of the neighboring cell is invalid. The neighboring

cells whose priority flag is FALSE are the last ones to be considered
as the measurement objects in the neighboring cell combination
algorithm.
TRUE: The priority of the neighboring cell is valid in the neighboring

cell combination algorithm. .
Set this parameter through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL/MOD

INTRAFREQNCELL / ADD INTERFREQNCELL/MOD INTERFREQNCELL /
ADD GSMNCELL/MOD GSMNCELL
The priority of neighbor cell
Parameter ID: NPrio
The default value of this parameter is None
Content:
When The flag of the priority is TRUE, The priority of neighbor cell specifies
the priority of neighboring cells. The smaller the parameter value is, the higher
the priority is and the more easily the neighboring cell is chosen as a
measurement object in the neighboring cell combination algorithm. For
example, the neighboring cells with priority 1 are more easily chosen as the
measurement objects than the cells with priority 2 in the neighboring cell
combination algorithm.
Set this parameter through
ADD INTRAFREQNCELL/MOD INTRAFREQNCELL / ADD

INTERFREQNCELL/MOD INTERFREQNCELL / ADD GSMNCELL/MOD
GSMNCELL
125
Contents
Page60
126
Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover

There are five types of signaling procedures for intrafrequency handover:
Intra-NodeB Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
Intra-RNC Inter-NodeB Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
Inter-RNC Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
Intra-RNC Inter-NodeB Intra-Frequency Hard Handover
Inter-RNC Intra-Frequency Hard Handover
Page61
127

Intra-NodeB Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
Page62
128

Intra-RNC Inter-NodeB Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
Page63
129

Inter-RNC Intra-Frequency Soft Handover
Page64
130

Intra-RNC Inter-NodeB Intra-Frequency Hard Handover
Page65
131
Contents
Page66
132
Contents
z Inter-Frequency Handover Overview
z Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure
z Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover
Page67
133
Inter-Frequency Overview
Characters of Inter-Frequency Handover:
z
The carrier frequency of the current cell and target cell are different
Based on the triggering causes of handover, inter-frequency handover

can be categorized into four types .
Coverage-based
QoS-based
Load-based
Speed-based
Coverage-based inter-frequency handover
According to the Link Stability Control Algorithm, the RNC needs to trigger the
QoS-based inter-frequency handover to avoid call drops.
Load-based inter-frequency blind handover
If a moving UE leaves the coverage of the current frequency, the RNC needs
to trigger the coverage-based inter-frequency handover to avoid call drops
QoS-based inter-frequency handover
Page68
To balance the load between inter-frequency con-coverage cells, the RNC

chooses some UEs and performs the inter-frequency blind handover
according to user priorities and service priorities.
Speed-based inter-frequency handover
When the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) applies, the cells are divided into
different layers according to coverage. The macro cell has a larger coverage
and a lower priority, whereas the micro cell has a smaller coverage and a
higher priority. Inter-frequency handover can be triggered by the UE speed
estimation algorithm of the HCS. To reduce the frequencies of handover, the
UE at a higher speed is handed over to a cell under a larger coverage,
whereas the UE at a lower speed is handed over to a cell under a smaller
coverage.
134
Contents
1. Inter-Frequency Handover Overview
2. Inter-Frequency Handover Procedure
1. Coverage-based inter-frequency handover
2. QoS-based inter-frequency handover
3. Load-based inter-frequency handover
4. Speed-based inter-frequency handover
5. Blind handover Based on Event 1F
6. Inter-frequency anti-PingPong
7. Inter-frequency handover retry
3. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover
Page69
135
Procedure of Coverage-based inter-frequency handover
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover
z
In the triggering phase

The RNC notifies the UE to measure through an inter-frequency measurement control
message. If the quality of the pilot signal in the current cell deteriorates, the CPICH Ec/No or
CPICH RSCP of the UMTS cell that the UE accesses is lower than the corresponding
threshold, and the UE reports event 2D.
In the measurement phase

If the RNC receives a report of event 2D, the RNC requests the NodeB and UE to start the
compressed mode to measure the qualities of inter-frequency neighboring cells, and the RNC
sends an inter-frequency measurement control message.
In the measurement phase, the method of either periodical measurement report or eventtriggered measurement report can be used.
In the decision phase

After the UE reports event 2B, the RNC performs the handover. Otherwise, the UE periodically
generates measurement reports, and the RNC makes a decision after evaluation.
In the execution phase

The RNC executes the handover procedure.
136

MEASUREMENT EVENTS
Event
2D
Description
The estimated quality or strength of the currently used frequency is below a

certain threshold.
2F
The estimated quality or strength of the currently used frequency is above a

certain threshold.
Page71
When the estimated quality or strength of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold,2D
Event will be triggered, Then RNC will initiate the compress Mode to start interfrequency or inter-RAT handover measurement.
During compress mode, if the the estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a certain
threshold, 2F
Event will be triggered, Then RNC will stop the compress Mode.
137

Compressed Mode
z
Purpose
Measure the inter-frequency cell or Inter-RAT cell under FDD mode
Categories
Downlink compressed mode
Uplink compressed mode
Realization Methods
SF/2
Higher layer scheduling
Page72
Compressed Mode control is a mechanism whereby certain idle periods are created
in radio frames during which the UE can perform measurements on other frequencies.
The UE can carry out measurements in the neighbouring cell, such as GSM cell and
FDD cell on other frequency. If the UE needs to measure the pilot signal strength of
an inter-frequency WCDMA or GSM cell and has one frequency receiver only, the UE
must use the compressed mode.
Each physical frame can provide 3 to 7 timeslots for the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
cell measurement, which enhances the transmit capability of physical channels but
reduces the volume of data traffic.
In DL, during compressed mode ,UE receiver can test signal from other frequency. In
order to avoid the effect cause by UE transmitter, compress mode is also used in UL.
The compressed mode includes two types, spreading factor reduction (SF/2) and high
layer approaches. The usage of type of compressed mode is decided by the RNC,
according to spreading factor used in uplink or downlink.
138

2D EVENT
QUsed <= TUsed2d - H2d/2
Page73
QUsed is the measured quality of the used frequency.

TUsed2d is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current
frequency. Based on the service type (CS , PS domain R99 service, or PS
domain HSPA service) and measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP),
this threshold can be configured through one of the following parameters:
Inter-freq CS measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-freq H measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS measure start RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure start RSCP THD
Inter-freq H measure start RSCP THD
H2d is the event 2D hysteresis value 2D hysteresis.
After the conditions of event 2D are fulfilled and maintained until the parameter 2D
event trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2D measurement
report message.
Note:
Any of the Ec/No and RSCP measurement result can trigger the 2D event.
139
Parameters of inter-frequency handover

z
Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2DEcNo
The default value of this parameter is -14dB
Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2DEcNo
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2DEcN0

Page74
Value range: 24 to 0 ,step :1dB.
Content: If the CS service uses Ec/No as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2D when the
measurement value is lower than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to enable the compressed
mode and to start the inter-frequency measurement.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET

INTERFREQHOCOV .

Content: If the PS domain R99 service uses Ec/No as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2D
when the measurement value is lower than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to enable the
compressed mode and to start the inter-frequency measurement.

INTERFREQHOCOV
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2DEcN0

Content: For PS domain HSPA services, when Ec/No is used as the measurement quantity for interfrequency measurement, the RNC sends the signaling to activate compressed mode and start interfrequency measurement, if the UE reports the event 2D when the measured value is smaller than the
value of this parameter.

INTERFREQHOCOV
140

The default value of this parameter is -95dBm
Parameter ID : InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2DRSCP

Page75
Value range: 115 to -25 dBm ,step :1dB.
Content: If the CS service uses RSCP as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2D
when the measurement value is lower than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to
enable the compressed mode and to start the inter-frequency measurement..
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/MOD

CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERFREQHOCOV .
Content: If the PS domain R99 service uses RSCP as a measurement quantity, the UE
reports event 2D when the measurement value is lower than the threshold. The RNC sends a
message to enable the compressed mode and to start the inter-frequency measurement.

CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERFREQHOCOV
z
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2DRSCP
Content: For PS domain HSPA services, when RSCP is used as the measurement quantity
for inter-frequency measurement, the RNC sends the signaling to activate compressed mode
and start inter-frequency measurement, if the UE reports the event 2D when the measured
value is smaller than the value of this parameter .

141

2D hysteresis
Parameter ID : TimeToTrig2D
Page76
2D hysteresis
Value range: 0 to 29 step :0.5dB.
Content: This parameter specifies the event 2D trigger hysteresis, which is related
to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of
ping-pong effect and misjudgment. In this case, however, the event cannot be
triggered in time.

Value range: D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320,
D640, D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 2D trigger delay, which is
related to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the
probability of misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to the changes
of measured signals at a lower speed.

142
Coverage-based inter-frequency
handover
z
2F EVENT
Event 2F is triggered on the basis of the following formula
QUsed >= TUsed2d - H2d/2
Page77
TUsed2f is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency.
Based on the service type (CS , PS domain R99 service or PS domain HSPA
service) and measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP), this threshold can be
configured through the following parameters:
Inter-freq CS measure stop Ec/No THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD
Inter-freq H measure stop Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS measure stop RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop RSCP THD
Inter-freq H measure stop RSCP THD

H2f is the event 2F hysteresis value 2F hysteresis.
After the conditions of event 2F are fulfilled and maintained until the parameter 2F
event trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2F measurement
report message.
Note:
Any of Ec/No and RSCP measurement result can trigger the 2F event.
143

Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo
Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2FEcNo
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2FEcN0

Page78
Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo
Content: If the CS service uses Ec/No as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2F
when the measurement value is higher than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to
disable the compressed mode and to stop the inter-frequency measurement.

Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2FEcNo
Content: If the PS domain R99 service uses Ec/No as a measurement quantity, the UE
reports event 2F when the measurement value is higher than the threshold. The RNC sends a
message to disable the compressed mode and to stop the inter-frequency measurement.

z
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2FEcN0
Content: For PS domain HSPA services, when Ec/No is used as the measurement quantity
for inter-frequency measurement, the RNC sends the signaling to deactivate compressed
mode and stop inter-frequency measurement, if the UE reports the event 2F when the
measured value is larger than the value of this parameter .

144

Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP
The default value of this parameter is -92 dBm
Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2FRSCP

Page79
Parameter ID: InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP
Content: If the CS service uses RSCP as a measurement quantity, the UE reports event 2F
when the measurement value is higher than the threshold. The RNC sends a message to
disable the compressed mode and to stop the inter-frequency measurement.

Parameter ID : InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP
Content: If the PS domain R99 service uses RSCP as a measurement quantity, the UE
reports event 2F when the measurement value is higher than the threshold. The RNC sends a
message to disable the compressed mode and to stop the inter-frequency measurement.

z
Parameter ID : InterFreqHThd2FRSCP
Content: For PS domain HSPA services, when RSCP is used as the measurement quantity
for inter-frequency measurement, the RNC sends the signaling to deactivate compressed
mode and stop inter-frequency measurement, if the UE reports the event 2F when the
measured value is larger than the value of this parameter .

145

2F hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor2F
2F event trigger delay time
z2F
Page80
hysteresis
Parameter ID: Hystfor2F
Value range: 0 to 29 step :0.5dB.
Content: This parameter specifies the event 2F trigger hysteresis, which is

related to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller
the probability of ping-pong effect and misjudgment. In this case, however,
the event cannot be triggered in time.
z2F
event trigger delay time
Value range: D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200,
D240, D320, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 2F trigger delay, which
is related to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller
the probability of misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to
the changes of measured signals at a lower speed.

146

Handover Measurement
RNC
UE
Measurement report
2D
Physical Channel Recfg (CM)

Physical Channel Recfg Complet(CM)
Measurement control (RSCP)
Measurement control (Ec/No)
Page81
When the UE enters the compress mode, RNC will trigger the inter-frequency handover
measurement by two additional measurement control signaling , so as to request UE
test inter-frequency neighbor cell.
In this Measurement control message, RNC should inform the UE inter-frequency
measurement parameter (Neighbor list, reporting mode)
147

z
Report Mode
RNC
UE
Measurement control (Periodical, RSCP&Ec/No)
RNC
UE
Measurement control (Event triggering, RSCP)

Measurement control (Event triggering ,Ec/No)
Measurement report
Measurement report (2B RSCP or Ec/No)
Measurement report
Measurement report
Handover
Handover
Periodical_reporting
Event_trigger
Page82
The measurement report mode of inter-frequency handover is configured through the

parameter Inter-frequency measure report mode. By default ,periodically reporting
is recommended.
The advantage of periodical measurement report is that if the handover fails, the RNC
reattempts the handover to the same cell after receiving the periodical measurement
report from the UE. This increases the probability of the success of inter-frequency
handover.
Based on the measurement control message received from the RNC, the UE periodically
reports the measurement quality of the target cell. Then, based on the measurement
report, the RNC makes the handover decision and performs handover.
148
Parameters of inter-frequency
handover
z
Inter-frequency measure report mode
Parameter ID: InterFreqReportMode
The default value of this parameter is Periodical reporting
Inter-frequency measure periodical rpt period
Parameter ID: PeriodReportInterval
Inter-freq measure timer length
Parameter ID: InterFreqMeasTime
The default value of this parameter is 60 (60 s)
Page83
Inter-frequency measure report mode

Parameter ID: InterFreqReportMode
Value range :Periodical reporting, Event trigger
Content: This parameter specifies the inter-frequency measurement report mode.
zInter-frequency measure periodical rpt period
Value range : NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000, 8000,
12000, 16000, 20000, 24000, 28000, 32000, 64000
The default value of this parameter is D500 (500ms)
Content: This parameter specifies the interval of the inter-frequency measurement report.
zInter-freq measure timer length
Value range : 0 to 512 ,step 1s
Content: This parameter specifies the inter-frequency measurement timer length of the interfrequency handover based on coverage or speed. This parameter has no effect on the interfrequency measurement based on QoS.
If no such type of inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiry of the interfrequency measurement timer, the system stops the inter-frequency
measurement and disables the compressed mode.
If this parameter is set to 0, the RNC does not start the inter-frequency
measurement timer. .
Set this parameter for handover based on coverage through ADD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERFREQHOCOV
z
149
Coverage-based inter-frequency
handover
z
Event 2B is triggered on the basis of the following formula
QNoused >= TNoused2b + H2b/2
QUsed <= TUsed2b - H2b/2
Page84
QNoused is the measured quality of the cell that uses the other frequencies.
TNoused2b is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the other frequencies. Based
on the service type (CS , PS domain) and measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP),
this threshold can be configured through the following parameters:
Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger RSCP THD
150
QUsed is the measured quality of the cell that uses the current frequency.
TUsed2b is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency.
Based on the service type (CS service, PS domain service) and the measurement quantity
(CPICH Ec/No or RSCP) in the coverage-based handover, TUsed2b can be configured
through the following parameters.
If the event 2D with the CPICH RSCP value is received by the RNC,
TUsed2b of event 2B with the CPICH RSCP value can be:

Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD
TUsed2b of event 2B with the CPICH Ec/No value is configured as the maximum value 0
dB according to 3GPP specification.
If the event 2D with the CPICH Ec/No value is received by the RNC,
TUsed2b of event 2B with the CPICH Ec/No value can be

Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD
TUsed2b of event 2B with the CPICH RSCP value is configured as the maximum
value -25 dB according to 3GPP specification.
H2b is the event 2B hysteresis value 2B hysteresis.
151
Handover
Parameter ID: TargetFreqCsThdEcN0
The default value of this parameter is 12 dB
Parameter ID: UsedFreqCSThdEcN0
Page86
Parameter ID: TargetFreqCsThdEcN0
Value range :24 to 0, step 1dB
Content: If the CS service inter-frequency handover uses the event-triggered measurement

report mode, event 2B may be triggered when the Ec/No value of the target frequency is
higher than the threshold. In periodical measurement report mode, this parameter is used for
handover evaluation on the RNC side.

Parameter ID: UsedFreqCSThdEcN0
Content: If the CS service inter-frequency handover uses the event-triggered measurement

report mode, event 2B may be triggered when the Ec/No value of the used frequency is lower
than the threshold.

Event 2B is triggered only when the two necessary conditions are met at the same time.
152
handover
z
2B Event default setting

Target cell
Used cell
CS Ec/No threshold -12dB
-12dB
PS Ec/No threshold
-12dB
-12dB
CS RSCP threshold -92dBm
-92dBm
PS RSCP threshold -92dBm
-92dBm
Page87
153
handover
2B hysteresis
Parameter ID: TimeToTrig2B
Page88
2B hysteresis
Value range :0 to 29 , step 0.5dB
Content: This parameter specifies the event 2B trigger hysteresis, which is related
triggered in time.

Parameter ID: TimeToTrig2B
Value range D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320,
D640, D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 2B trigger delay, which is
related to slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the
probability of misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to the changes
of measured signals at a lower speed.

154

Handover Decision and Execution
Periodical Measurement Report Mode
Event-Triggered Measurement Report Mode
Page89
The coverage-based handover decision is categorized into two types according to the
following two measurement report modes: periodical measurement report mode
and event-triggered measurement report mode. Each mode corresponds to a
different decision and execution procedure.
155

Based on the event 2B measurement reports of CPICH RSCP and

event 2B CPICH Ec/No of the inter-frequency cell
Page90
RNC process the report by following procedure:
Add all the pilot cells that trigger event 2B to a cell set and arrange the cells
according to the measurement quality of CPICH_Ec/No in descending
order.
Select the cells in turn from the cell set to perform inter-frequency handover.
156

Both the CPICH Ec/No value and CPICH RSCP
value of the pilot signal of the target cell must meet
the requirement
Mother_Freq + CIOother_Freq Tother_Freq + H/2

NOTE: No consideration of the current cell
Page91
Mother_Freq is the CPICH Ec/No or CPICH RSCP measurement value of the

target cell reported by the UE. Both of the two measurement values of the
inter-frequency cell must satisfy the formula.
CIOother_Freq is the cell individual offset value of the target cell. It is equal to
the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neigbhoring cell
oriented CIO.
Tother_Freq is the decision threshold of inter-frequency hard handover.

Based on the service type (CS or PS service) and measurement quantity (CPICH
Ec/No or CPICH RSCP), this threshold can be configured through the following
parameters:
Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq H target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger RSCP THD
Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger RSCP THD
Inter-freq H target frequency trigger RSCP THD
NOTE:
These thresholds are the same as the quality threshold of event 2B.
H is the inter-frequency hard handover hysteresis value HHO hysteresis.
157

Page92
Decide whether both the CPICH Ec/No value and CPICH RSCP value of
the pilot signal of the target cell meet the requirement of inter-frequency
handover.
Start the hard handover time-to-trigger timer, which is configured through

the parameter HHO period trigger delay time.
Select the cells in sequence, that is, from high quality cells to low quality
ones, to initiate inter-frequency handover in the cells where the hard
handover time-to-trigger timer expires.
158

Parameter ID: CIO
Neigbhoring cell oriented CIO
HHO hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystForPrdInterFreq
zCell
Page93
oriented Cell Individual Offset
Parameter ID: CIO
Value range: -10 to +10
Content: This parameter is used together with Neighboring cell oriented CIO. The sum of the
two parameter values is added to the measurement quantity before the UE evaluates whether
an event occurred. In handover algorithms, this parameter is used for moving the border of a
cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP/MOD CELLSETUP
zNeigbhoring
cell oriented CIO
Value range :20 to +20 , step:0.5dB
Content: The sum of the value of this parameter and the Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset specifies
the offset of the cell CPICH measurement value. In handover algorithms, this parameter is used for
moving the border of a cell.

INTERFREQHOCOV
zHHO
hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystForPrdInterFreq
Value range 0 to 29 , step:0.5dB
Content: This parameter is used to evaluate the inter-frequency handover on the RNC side. The greater
the value of the parameter, the smaller the probability of the ping-pong effect and misjudgment. In this
case, however, the speed of response to handover is lower.

INTERFREQHOCOV
159
Contents
Page94
160
Procedure of QoS-based inter-frequency handover :
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover measurement,
handover decision, and handover execution.
Besides the triggering step, the rest 3 steps are the same with Coverage-based inter-frequency handover
z

If the service quality of the current cell deteriorates, the Link Stability Control Algorithm makes a handover
measurement decision.

The RNC requests the NodeB and the UE to start the compressed mode to measure the qualities of interfrequency neighboring cells. Then, the RNC sends inter-frequency measurement control messages.
In the measurement phase, the method of periodical measurement report or event-triggered measurement
report can be used.

After receiving the event 2B measurement reports of CPICH RSCP and CPICH Ec/No of the interfrequency cell, the RNC performs the handover. Otherwise, the UE periodically generates
measurement reports, and the RNC makes a decision after evaluation.

Note :
About Link Stability Control Algorithm :
When the uplink transmit power of the UE or downlink transmitted code power of the NodeB exceeds the
associated threshold :
z
For AMR, a fixed sequence of rate downsizing, inter-frequency handover, and then inter-RAT handover
are performed,
for VP ,Inter-handover handover are performed,
For BE service, rate downsizing, inter-frequency handover, and then inter-RAT handover are performed
according to the configured sequence
161
InterFreq Handover Switch based on Uplink Traffic AMR
Parameter ID: UlQoSAmrInterFreqHoSwitch
The default value of this parameter is NO
InterFreq Handover Switch based on Downlink Traffic AMR
Parameter ID: DlQoSAmrInterFreqHoSwitch
zInterFreq
Handover Switch based on Uplink/Downlink Traffic AMR
Parameter ID : UlQoSAmrInterFreqHoSwitch/
Page96
DlQoSAmrInterFreqHoSwitch
Value range NO, YES
Content: If the value of this parameter is YES, inter-frequency handover
can be executed on the basis of the downlink/uplink QoS of AMR services.
Set this parameter through SET QOSACT
162
InterFreq Handover Switch based on Uplink Traffic VP
Parameter ID: UlQoSVPInterFreqHoSwitch
InterFreq Handover Switch based on Downlink Traffic VP
Parameter ID: DlQoSVPInterFreqHoSwitch
zInterFreq
Handover Switch based on Uplink/Downlink Traffic VP
Parameter ID : UlQoSVPInterFreqHoSwitch/
Page97
DlQoSVPInterFreqHoSwitch
Value range NO, YES
Content: If the value of this parameter is YES, inter-frequency handover
can be executed on the basis of the downlink/uplink QoS of VP services.
163

First / Second / Third Uplink QOS Enhancement Action for Traffic BE
Parameter ID: BeUlAct1/ BeUlAct2/ BeUlAct3
The default value of this parameter is RateDegrade/ InterFreqHO/ InterRatHO
First / Second / Third Downlink QOS Enhancement Action for Traffic BE
Parameter ID: BeDlAct1/ BeDlAct2/ BeDlAct3
Page98
Parameter ID : BeUlAct1/ BeUlAct2/ BeUlAct3
Value range None, RateDegrade, InterFreqHO, InterRatHO
Content: This parameter defines the action sequence to enhance the
Uplink QoS of BE services .
Parameter ID : BeDlAct1/ BeDlAct2/ BeDlAct3
Content: This parameter defines the action sequence to enhance the
downlink QoS of BE services .
164
Down Link QoS Measure timer length
Parameter ID: DLQoSMcTimerLen
The default value of this parameter is 20 (20s)
Up Link QoS Measure timer length
Parameter ID: UpQoSMcTimerLen
Page99
Parameter ID : DLQoSMcTimerLen
Value range 0 to 512 ,step 1s
Content: This parameter specifies the inter-frequency measurement timer length of the interfrequency handover based on downlink QoS. This parameter has no effect on the interfrequency measurement based on coverage.
If no QoS-based inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiry of the

downlink inter-frequency measurement timer, the RNC stops the QoS-based
inter-frequency measurement.
QoS-based measurement timer.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLQOSHO/MOD CELLQOSHO/SET QOSHO
Parameter ID : UpQoSMcTimerLen
Value range 0 to 512 ,step 1s
Content: This parameter specifies the inter-frequency measurement timer length of the interfrequency handover based on uplink QoS. This parameter has no effect on the interfrequency measurement based on coverage.
If no QoS-based inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiry of the uplink

inter-frequency measurement timer, the RNC stops the inter-frequency
measurement and disables the compressed mode.
QoS-based measurement timer. .
165
Contents
Page100
166
Procedure of Load-based inter-frequency

handover :
The handover procedure is divided into three phases: handover triggering, handover
decision, and handover execution
There is no measurement of the target cell, so we call it blind handover.
z

The Load Reshuffling (LDR) module directly determines whether the current cell is
overloaded and whether an inter-frequency handover needs to be performed. The
LDR module provides the target cell information for the current cell, and the RNC
performs the handover procedure.
The RNC decides to trigger an inter-frequency blind handover if If the blind

handover neighbors are configured :
After the inter-frequency handover is triggered, the RNC chooses a decision

algorithm according to whether the conditions Blind handover condition of
direct blind handover are met.
If the value of the parameter of a cell is -115, the RNC performs direct
blind handover to this cell.
If there is no such cell with the parameter value -115, the RNC initiates
an intra-frequency measurement for conditional blind handover.
The RNC performs the blind handover according to the decision result.
167
Load-based inter-frequency handover

Handover triggering
z
Target user
User with lower integrated priority
Target cell
Blind handover neighbor
Page102
Based on the service ARP, Traffic class, Channel type(R99, HSDPA), RNC will
choose the users with lower priority to execute handover .
The target cell of this inter-frequency handover are only the blind handover neighbors
with light load.which is indicated by the Blind handover flag
168

Blind handover flag
Parameter ID: BlindHOFlag
The default value of this parameter is False
zCell
oriented Cell Individual Offset
Parameter ID : BlindHOFlag
Page103
Value range FALSE, TRUE
Content: This parameter indicates whether the neighboring cell is the
target cell for blind handovers. If the value is TRUE, blind handovers can be
performed to the neighboring cell.
Set this parameter through ADD INTERFREQNCELL/MOD
INTERFREQNCELL
169

The RNC determines to trigger an inter-frequency blind handover
RNC performs direct blind handover or conditional blind handover
Page104
After the RNC determines to trigger an inter-frequency blind handover ,according to

the parameter Blind handover condition, the RNC executes:
If the value of the parameter of a cell is -115, the RNC performs direct blind
handover to this cell.
If there is no such cell with the parameter value -115, the RNC initiates an
intra-frequency measurement for conditional blind handover.
Note:
If the neighboring cells have the same Blind handover condition value, the
RNC chooses any one of them.
170

z
Conditional Blind Handover

The inter-frequency cells with the same coverage area have the same CPICH
RSCP values. By measuring the CPICH RSCP of the current cell, the quality
of the cells with the same coverage area can be determined, which increases
the probability of successful blind handover
Page105
The intra-frequency measurement for conditional blind handover is described as follows:

1.The RNC initializes the timer of intra-frequency measurement for blind handover. The timer
is specified by internal algorithm and needn't to be configured.
2. The RNC modifies the measurement mode:
The measurement reporting mode is changed to periodic reporting by a new
measurement control . The reporting period is Intrafrequency measurement
report interval of blind handover. The measurement reporting number is
Intrafrequency measurement report amount of blind handover.The intrafrequency measurement quantity is CPICH RSCP.
3. After receiving from the UE the intra-frequency measurement reports for conditional blind
handover, the RNC checks whether the following condition is met:
CPICH RSCP of the cell in the measurement report >= Blind handover condition
If the condition is met, the RNC increments the counter of the number of intrafrequency measurement reports for blind handover by 1. If the condition is not met,
the RNC does not perform a blind handover to the cell that triggers LDR and stops
intra-frequency measurement for blind handover.
When the counter reaches the value of Intrafrequency measurement report
amount of blind handover, the RNC initiates a blind handover to the cell that
triggers LDR.
If the counter does not reach this value, the RNC waits for the next intra-frequency
measurement report from the UE.
If the timer of intra-frequency measurement for blind handover expires, the RNC
does not perform a blind handover to the cell that triggers LDR and stops intrafrequency handover for blind handover.
171

Blind handover condition
Parameter ID: BlindHOQualityCondition
The default value of this parameter is -92 (-92dBm)
Intrafrequency measurement report interval of blind handover
Parameter ID: BlindHOIntrafreqMRInterval
Intrafrequency measurement report amount of blind handover
Parameter ID: BlindHOIntrafreqMRAmount
Page106
Blind handover condition
Parameter ID : BlindHOQualityCondition
Value range -115 to -25 , step:1dB
Content: This parameter specifies whether the cell supports a direct or conditional blind
handover.
The value -115 indicates that the cell supports a direct blind handover. This
value is usually used in configuration of inter-frequency cells with large
coverage areas overlapped.
The other values indicate that the cell supports a conditional blind handover.
This value is usually used in configuration of inter-frequency cells with some
coverage areas overlapped.
Set this parameter through ADD INTERFREQNCELL/MOD INTERFREQNCELL
Intrafrequency measurement report interval of blind handover
Parameter ID: BlindHOIntrafreqMRInterval
Value range D250, D500
Content: This parameter specifies the intra-frequency measurement period for blind
handover.
Intrafrequency measurement report amount of blind handover
Parameter ID: BlindHOIntrafreqMRAmount
Value range D1, D2, D4, D8
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of intra-frequency measurement

reports for blind handover

172
Contents
Page107
173
Procedure of Speed-based inter-frequency handover :
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover measurement
handover decision, and handover execution
z

The RNC receives the internal handover request according to the HCS speed estimation. The
handover based on HCS speed estimation is of two types:
When the UE is in low-speed state, RNC will trigger handover from the macro cell to the micro
cell.
When the UE is in high-speed state, RNC will trigger handover from the micro cell to the macro
cell.
For different types of handover, the RNC acts differently.
If the handover is performed from a macro cell to a micro cell, the RNC triggers compressed
mode ,then sends an inter-frequency measurement control message for 2C event to start the
inter-frequency measurement procedure
If the handover is performed from a micro cell to a macro cell, the RNC directly performs blind
handover, without measurement procedure. only if the handover fails, the RNC triggers
compressed mode ,then sends an inter-frequency measurement control message for 2C event
to start the inter-frequency measurement procedure

For handover from a macro cell to a micro cell, after the UE reports event 2C, the RNC performs the
handover decision.

The RNC initiates a handover procedure.
If the handover is performed from a micro cell to a macro cell and the target cell of blind
handover is configured, the RNC performs blind handover to the target cell.
If the blind handover fails or the handover is performed from a macro cell to a micro cell, the
RNC performs the inter-frequency handover procedure to the cell with the best quality after
receiving event 2C from the UE.
174

MEASUREMENT EVENTS
Event
2C
Description
The estimated quality of a non-used frequency is above a certain

threshold.
Page109
Event 2C is only used in Speed-based inter-frequency handover.

After
RNC believe the UE is in low-speed state, RNC will start handover from the macro
cell to the micro cell.

RNC triggers compressed mode firstly, then sends an inter-frequency measurement
control message for 2C event to start the inter-frequency measurement procedure.
175

2C EVENT
QNoused >= TNoused2c + H2c/2
2C only takes the Ec/No as the measurement quantity
Page110
QNoused is the measured quality of the cell that uses the other frequencies.
TNoused2c is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the other
frequencies, namely, Inter-freq measure target frequency trigger Ec/No THD.
H2c is the event 2C hysteresis value 2C hysteresis.
2C event trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2C

measurement report message.
2C Event only takes the Ec/No as the measurement quantity.
176

Inter-freq measure target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Parameter ID: InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0
The default value of this parameter is -16 (-16dB)
2C hysteresis
Page111
Inter-freq measure target frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Parameter ID : InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0
Value range -24 to 0, step:1dB
The default value of this parameter is -16 (-16dB),
Content: When the Ec/No value of the target frequency is higher than the threshold, event
2C can be triggered
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERFREQHONCOV/MOD

CELLINTERFREQHONCOV/SET INTERFREQHONCOV
2C hysteresis
Value range 0 to 29
The default value of this parameter is 6(3dB)
Content: This parameter specifies the event 2C trigger hysteresis, which is related to slow
fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of ping-pong effect
and misjudgment. In this case, however, the event cannot be triggered in time.

Value range D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640,
D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 2C trigger delay, which is related to
slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of
misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to the changes of measured signals
at a lower speed.

177
Contents
Page112
178
Blind handover Based on Event 1F

Blind Handover
z
Handover without measuring the neighboring cell
Load-based handover
Speed-based handover from micro cell to macro cell
1F event triggered inter-frequency handover
Page113
Blind handover is a special handover, means :before the handover, the UE neednt
report the target cell signal quality, RNC just select a target inter-frequency or interrat neighbor for the UE ,then force the UE handover to the target, the compressed
mode and inter-frequency measurement can be overleaped
The precondition of blind handover is :the blind handover neighbors are configured to
a cell (Blind handover flag ), which is discussed in the forenamed slides.
Blind handover may be triggered by load, UE speed and also the 1F event
179

MEASUREMENT EVENTS
Event
1F
Description
A Primary CPICH becomes worse than an absolute threshold.
Page114
1F Event is a intra-frequency measurement event, like 1A,1B,1C,1D.

Events 1A,1B,1C,1D are used to trigger intra-frequency handover, Event 1F only trigger
inter-frequency or inter-RAT blind handover.
180

1F EVENT
MOld <= T1f - H1f/2
Page115
MOld is the measurement value of the cell that becomes worse.
T1f is an absolute threshold. It is set to 1F event absolute EcNo threshold or 1F

event absolute RSCP threshold respectively, depending on the measurement
quantity.
After the conditions of event 1F are fulfilled and maintained until the 1F event
trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 1F measurement report
message.
181

1F event absolute EcNo threshold
Parameter ID: IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo
1F event absolute RSCP threshold
Parameter ID: IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP
Page116
1F event absolute EcNo threshold
Parameter ID : IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo
Value range -24 to 0, step:1dB
The default value of this parameter is -24 (-24dB),
Content: This parameter specifies the absolute EcNo threshold of event 1F. The
greater the parameter value is, the more easily event 1F is triggered. The smaller the
parameter value is, the harder event 1F is triggered.
1F event absolute RSCP threshold

Parameter ID: IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP
Value range -115 to -25 step:1dB
The default value of this parameter is -115(-115dBm)
Content: This parameter specifies the absolute RSCP threshold of event 1F. The
greater the parameter value is, the more easily event 1F is triggered. The smaller the
parameter value is, the harder event 1F is triggered.

182

1F hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystFor1F
Parameter ID: TrigTime1F
Page117
1F hysteresis
Parameter ID : HystFor1F
Value range 0 to 15, step:0.5dB
The default value of this parameter is 8 (4dB),
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis value of event 1D. It is related to the slow
fading characteristic. The greater the parameter value is, the smaller the probability of pingpong effect and misjudgment. In this case, however, the event cannot be triggered in time.
CELLINTRAFREQHO

Parameter ID: TrigTime1F
D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the trigger delay time of event 1F. It is related to the slow
fading characteristic. The greater the parameter value is, the smaller the misjudgment
probability, but the slower the response of the event to the measured signal changes.

183
Contents
Page118
184
Inter-frequency Anti-PingPong
z
The inter-frequency anti-ping-pong algorithm is as follows:
Step1-When a coverage-based inter-frequency handover or an inter-frequency

blind handover based on event 1F occurs, the RNC starts the timer specified
by The timer length of anti ping-pong NCOV interfreq handover for the UE
Step2-When a non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover is triggered, first,

the RNC determines whether the timer specified by The timer length of anti
ping-pong NCOV interfreq handover expires
If the timer does not expire, the RNC cancels the handover
If the timer expires, the RNC performs the handover
Parameters
The timer length of anti pingpong NCOV interfreq handover
Parameter ID: 1FAntiPingPongtimerLength
The default value of this parameter is 30s
Page119
The timer length of anti pingpong NCOV interfreq handover
Parameter ID :IFAntiPingpangTimerLength
Value range:0~120
Physical unit:s
Content: the length of anti non-coverage based inter-frequency pingpong handover timer.
Recommended value:30 Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM
185
Contents
Page120
186
Inter-frequency handover retry

z
If an inter-frequency handover
based on event-triggered
measurement report mode fails, the
RNC initiates the inter-frequency
handover attempt according to an
inter-frequency retry algorithm
After the inter-frequency handover
fails, the retry timer for the cell is
started. After the retry timer expires,
the UE makes a handover attempt
to the cell again until the retry
number exceeds the maximum
allowed retry number. If the
handover succeeds or two new
event 2B reports are received, the
periodical retry is stopped.
Handover
is failed
Retry condition
is satisfied?
2B event?
Start timer
END
Timer is
expired
Trigger
handover
2B measurement
control is
re-transmitted
implementation
For the inter-frequency handover based on coverage or QoS, the following two parameters
determine the retry period and the maximum number of retry times:
2B event retry period
2B event retry max times
For the inter-frequency handover based on speed, the following two parameters determine the
retry period and the maximum number of retry times:
2C event retry period
2C event retry max times
187
Inter-frequency handover retry

z
Parameters
Parameter ID: PeriodFor2B
The default value of this parameter is 500ms
Parameter ID: AmntOfRpt2B
The default value of this parameter is 63 (infinity)
Parameter ID: PeriodFor2C
Parameter ID: AmntOfRpt2C
Page122
Set above parameters through SET INTRERFREQHOCOV / ADD

CELLINTERFREQHOCOV / MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV
Set above parameters through SET INTRERFREQHONCOV / ADD

CELLINTERFREQHONCOV / MOD CELLINTERFREQHONCOV
188
Contents
Page123
189
Intra-RNC Inter-Frequency Handover
190
Inter-RNC Inter-Frequency Handover
191
Contents
Page126
192
Contents
1. Inter-RAT Handover Overview
2. Inter-RAT Handover Procedure
3. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover
Page127
193
Inter-RAT Handover Overview

Inter-RAT Handover Application Scenario
Page128
Inter-RAT handover provides coverage expansion, load sharing, and layered services.
It saves cost by utilizing the existing GSM network resources.
Inter-RAT handover refers to the handover between UMTS and GSM. The reason for
the handover can be coverage limitation, link stability control or load limitation of the
3G system.
Inter-RAT handover can be UMTS-to-GSM or GSM-to-UMTS handover.
Strategy of 2G and 3G cooperation is shown in the picture:
Based on coverage, QoS , Service, load and speed, RNC can trigger UE
handover from 3G to 2G; When UE return back to Idle Mode, trigger UE Cell
reselect to 3G.
In this handover, however, GSM and UMTS dual-mode UEs (MSs) are required, and
both the GSM MSC and the GSM BSS must be upgraded.
194

Classification of Inter-RAT Handover:
z
Based on the triggering causes of handover, inter-frequency

handover can be categorized into four types .
Coverage-based
QoS-based
Load-based
Service-based
Speed-based
If the load of the UMTS is heavy and all the RAB of a UE are supported by the GSM,
the load-based UMTS-to-GSM handover is triggered.
Service-based UMTS-to-GSM handover
According to the Link Stability Control Algorithm, the RNC needs to trigger the QoSbased UMTS-to-GSM handover to avoid call drops.
Load-based inter-frequency blind handover
The coverage of the UMTS is incontinuous at the initial stage of the 3G network. On
the border of the coverage, the poor signal quality of UMTS triggers the UMTS-to-GSM
measurement. If the signal quality of GSM is good enough and all the services of the
UE are supported by the GSM, the coverage-based UMTS-to-GSM handover is
triggered.
QoS-based inter-frequency handover
Page129
Based on layered services, the traffic of different classes is handed over to different
systems. For example, when an Adaptive Multi Rate (AMR) speech service is
requested, this service can be handed over to the GSM.
When the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) is used, the cells are divided into different
layers on the basis of coverage. Typically, a marco cell has large coverage and low
priority, whereas a micro cell has small coverage and high priority.UMTS-to-GSM
handover can be triggered by the UE speed estimation algorithm of the HCS. A UE
moving at high speed is handed over to a cell with larger coverage to reduce the times
of handover, whereas a UE moving at low speed is handed over to a cell with smaller
coverage.
195

Preconditions for UMTS-to-GSM Handover :
z
Service Handover Indicator
Capabilities of Deciding UMTS-to-GSM Handover
GSM neighboring cell capability
service capability
UE capability
Page130
Before handover, the RNC checks whether the preconditions meet the triggering requirements
of the UMTS-to-GSM handover. The preconditions include the service handover indicator,
GSM cell capability, service capability, and UE capability.
The parameter Service handover indicator indicates the CN policy for the service handover
to the GSM. This parameter is indicated in the Radio Access Bearer (RAB) assignment
signaling assigned by the CN, or can be configured on the RNC side by ADD/MOD
TYPRABBASIC .
Before deciding UMTS-to-GSM handover, the RNC considers GSM cell capability, service
capability and UE capability.
GSM cell capability could be GSM,GPRS,EDGE, it should be the real capability of

the GSM neighbor, and configured in RNC data base by LMT correctly
Service capability could be GSM,GPRS,EDGE also, it should be properly

configured in RNC data base by LMT
UE capability is reported by the UE itself in RRC Setup Complete message.
196

z
Service Handover Indicator
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM
HO_TO_GSM_SHALL_NOT_BE_PERFORM
Example of rules for indicator of UMTS-to-GSM handover based on load and service
Page131
Before handover, the RNC checks service handover indicator, This parameter is indicated in
the Radio Access Bearer (RAB) assignment signaling assigned by the CNThe service
handover indicators are as follows:
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM: means that the handover to the 2G network

is performed when 2G signals are available.
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM: means that the handover to the 2G
network is performed when 3G signals are weak but 2G signals are strong.
HO_TO_GSM_SHALL_NOT_BE_PERFORM: means that the handover to the 2G
network is not performed even when 3G signals are weak but 2G signals are strong.
197
For the UE accessing combined services (with CS services), the RNC sets the
service handover indicator of the UE to that of the CS service, because the CS
service has the highest QoS priority.
For the UE accessing combined services (with only PS services), the RNC sets the
service handover indicator of the UE to that of the PS service, which has the highest
QoS priority.
If service handover indicators are not configured by the CN, each indictor can be set
to Service parameter index of a service on the RNC.
Based on different service handover indicators .RNC may initiate different action, for
example, handover based on service are not not performed for the services whose
handover indicator is HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM or
HO_TO_GSM_SHALL_NOT_BE_PERFORM
198

z
Capabilities of Deciding UMTS-to-GSM Handover
GSM neighboring cell capability

NO_CAPABILITY, GSM, GPRS, EDGE
Service required capability

GSM, GPRS, EDGE
UE capability
GSM, GPRS, or EDGE
Note:
For Service-Based UMTS-to-GSM Handover, there
is an additional switch on RNC
Page133
The rules for enabling UMTS-to-GSM handover are based on the parameter Service Handover
Indicator and the three types of capability parameters. The rules vary with different types of
inter-RAT handover , that is , the 4 factors will decide if the inter-RAT handover is allowed.
The rules are:
z
Coverage-based and QoS-based UMTS-to-GSM handover
when Service Handover Indicator is set as follows:
In addition, the RNC initiates inter-RAT handover based on the following capabilities:
GSM cell capability (can be set on RNC)
Service required capability (can be set on RNC)
UE capability (reported from UE RRC setup complete message )
199
GSM neighboring cell with EDGE capability

Service capability (required by 2G)
UE Capability
EDGE
GPRS
GSM
EDGE
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
GPRS
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
GSM
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Not supported by 2G
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
GSM neighboring cell with GPRS capability

UE Capability
EDGE
GPRS
GSM
EDGE
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
GPRS
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
GSM
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Not supported by 2G
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
GSM neighboring cell with GSM capability

UE Capability
EDGE
GPRS
GSM
EDGE
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
GPRS
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
GSM
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Not supported by 2G
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
If the capability of all the GSM neighboring cells is "No

capability", the inter-RAT handover cannot be started.
200
load-based UMTS-to-GSM handover
service-based UMTS-to-GSM handover
The following switch are on:
Inter-RAT CS handover switch (service based)
Inter-RAT PS handover switch (service based)
In addition, the RNC initiates inter-RAT handover based on the following capabilities:
GSM cell capability (can be set on RNC)
Service required capability (can be set on RNC)
UE capability (reported from UE RRC setup complete message )
GSM neighboring cell with EDGE capability

UE Capability
EDGE
GPRS
GSM
Not supported by 2G
EDGE
GPRS
GSM
Allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
201
GSM neighboring cell with GPRS capability

UE Capability
EDGE
GPRS
GSM
EDGE
Not allowed
Allowed
Allowed
GPRS
Not allowed
Allowed
Allowed
GSM
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Not supported by 2G
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
GSM neighboring cell with GSM capability

UE Capability
EDGE
GPRS
GSM
EDGE
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
GPRS
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
GSM
Not allowed
Not allowed
Allowed
Not supported by 2G
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
If the capability of all the GSM neighboring cells is "No

capability", the inter-RAT handover cannot be started.
202

z
Inter-RAT Handover RNC Algorithm Switch

INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH
Default value is ON
INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH
Default value is ON
Page137
These switches are the parameter values of Handover algorithm switch in the command SET
CORRMALGOSWITCH.
INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH
The switch decides whether the RNC will initiate inter-RAT

measurement to trigger inter-RAT handover of the PS domain
from the UTRAN.
INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH
The switch decides whether the RNC will initiate inter-RAT

measurement to trigger inter-RAT handover of the CS domain
from the UTRAN.
203
Contents
1. Coverage-based inter-RAT handover
2. QoS-based inter-RAT handover
3. Load-based inter-RAT handover
4. Service-based inter-RAT handover
5. UMTS-to-GSM Multimedia Fallback
6. PS UMTS-to-GSM Handover with NACC
7. UMTS-to-GSM Handover retry
Page138
204
Coverage-based inter-RAT handover
Page139
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover
z

The RNC sends a MEASUREEMNT CONTROL message to the UE, notifying the UE to
measure the current carrier quality. This message defines the reporting rules and thresholds
of events 2D and 2F. If the quality of the pilot signal in the current cell deteriorates, the CPICH
Ec/No or CPICH RSCP of the UMTS cell that the UE accesses is lower than the
corresponding threshold and the UE reports event 2D.

If the RNC receives a report of event 2D, the RNC may request the NodeB and UE to start the
compressed mode to measure the qualities of GSM cells. Then, the RNC may send an interRAT measurement control message that defines the neighboring cell information, reporting
period, and reporting rule.
In the measurement phase, either periodical measurement report mode or event-triggered
measurement report mode can be used.

After the UE reports event 3A, the RNC makes a handover decision. Or, after the UE
periodically sends the measurement reports, the RNC evaluates the reports first and then
makes a handover decision.

205

MEASUREMENT EVENTS
Event
2D
Description
The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain

threshold.
2F
The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a certain

threshold.
Page140
When the estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold,2D Event
will be triggered, Then RNC will initiate the compress Mode to start inter-frequency or interRAT handover measurement.
During compress mode, if the the estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a
certain threshold, 2F Event will be triggered, Then RNC will stop the compress Mode.
206

2D EVENT
QUsed <= TUsed2d - H2d/2
Page141
TUsed2d is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency. Based on the
service type (CS , PS domain R99 service, or PS domain HSPA service) and measurement quantity
(CPICH Ec/No or RSCP), this threshold can be configured through one of the following parameters:
H2d is the event 2D hysteresis value 2D hysteresis.
After the conditions of event 2D are fulfilled and maintained until the parameter 2D event trigger
delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2D measurement report message.
Note:
Any of the Ec/No and RSCP measurement result can trigger the 2D event.
207
Parameters of inter-RAT handover

z
Inter-RAT CS measure start Ec/No THD
Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD
2D hysteresis
Inter-RAT H measure start RSCP THD
Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start RSCP THD
Inter-RAT CS measure start RSCP THD
Inter-RAT H measure start Ec/No THD
Page142
The parameters for inter-RAT handover 2D are similar with inter-frequency handover.
Set above parameters through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/MOD

CELLINTERRATHOCOV/SET INTERRATHOCOV
z
208

2F EVENT
QUsed >= TUsed2d - H2d/2
Page143

TUsed2f is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency. Based on
the service type (CS , PS domain R99 service or PS domain HSPA service) and
measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP), this threshold can be configured through
the following parameters:

After the conditions of event 2F are fulfilled and maintained until the parameter 2F event
trigger delay time is reached, the UE reports the event 2F measurement report message.
Note:
Any of the Ec/No and RSCP measurement result can trigger the 2F event.
209

z
Inter-RAT H measure stop Ec/No THD

Inter-RAT H measure stop RSCP THD
2F hysteresis

Page144
The parameters for inter-RAT handover 2D are similar with inter-frequency handover.
Set above parameters through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/MOD

210

Interoperability Between Inter-RAT and Inter-Frequency Handover
Inter-frequency measurement
2D, 2F Event
Inter-frequency neighbor
Measure
inter-frequency
neighbor?
Inter-RAT measurement
2D, 2F Event
Inter-RAT neighbor
Measure interRAT neighbor?
Page145
During the coverage-based and QoS-based UMTS-to-GSM handover, the measurements on

both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells can be made, which enables the cells
to provide continuous coverage and high quality.
The preconditions for the measurements are as follows:
Both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells are available.
Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch is set to SIMINTERFREQRAT.

If Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch is set as follows:
Inter-frequency measurement, which means that the RNC allows the UE to perform only
this type of measurement.
Inter-RAT measurement, which means that the RNC allows the UE to perform only this type
of measurement.
Concurrent inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurement, which means that the RNC allows
the UE to perform both types of measurement in compressed mode at the same time.
211

z
Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch
Parameter ID: InterFreqRATSwitch
The default value of this parameter is SIMINTERFREQRAT
InterFreq & InterRat coexist measure threshold choice
Parameter ID: CoexistMeasThdChoice
The default value of this parameter is

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ
Page146
Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch
Parameter ID : InterFreqRATSwitch
Value range INTERFREQ, INTERRAT, SIMINTERFREQRAT
The default value of this parameter is SIMINTERFREQRAT
Content: This parameter specifies the type of cells to be measured when inter-frequency and interRAT adjacent cells coexist:
InterFreq: means that only the inter-frequency cells are measured and inter-frequency handover is
performed.
InterRAT: means that only the GSM cells are measured and inter-RAT handover is performed.
SimInterFreqRAT: means that both inter-frequency and inter-RAT cells are measured and interfrequency or inter-RAT handover is performed according to the type of the cell that first meets the
condition for handover decision. If only the inter-frequency cells or inter-RAT cells exist, the value of
this parameter is invalid
Set this parameter through ADD CELLHOCOMM/MOD CELLHOCOMM
During the concurrent inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurement, the values of the parameter
InterFreq & InterRat coexist measure threshold choice for events 2D and 2F are chosen as follows:
When the value COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ is chosen, the inter-frequency

measurement threshold for event 2D is used.
When the value COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT is chosen, the inter-RAT measurement

threshold for event 2D is used.
InterFreq & InterRat coexist measure threshold choice

Parameter ID: CoexistMeasThdChoice
Value range COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ,
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT
The default value of this parameter is COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ
Content: This parameter specifies the type of event 2D/2F measurement thresholds when interfrequency and inter-RAT adjacent cells coexist.
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ: represents the event 2D/2F measurement threshold

for the inter-frequency measurement.
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT: represents the event 2D/2F measurement threshold

for the inter-RAT measurement.
Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM/ADD CELLHOCOMM/MOD CELLHOCOMM
212

RNC
UE
Measurement report
2D
Physical Channel Recfg (CM)

Physical Channel Recfg Complet(CM)
Measurement control
Page147
When the UE enters the compress mode, RNC will trigger the inter-RAT handover measurement
by one additional measurement control signaling , so as to request UE test inter-RAT neighbor
cell.
In this Measurement control message, RNC should inform the UE inter-RAT measurement
parameter (Neighbor list, reporting mode)
213

Report Mode
RNC
UE
RNC
UE
Measurement control (Event triggering,

GSM RSSI ,WCDMA RSCP or Ec/No)
Measurement control (Periodical, RSSI)
Measurement report
Measurement report (3A)
Measurement report
Measurement report
Handover
Handover
Periodical_reporting
Event_trigger
Page148
The measurement report mode of inter-RAT handover is configured through the parameter Interfrequency measure report mode. By default ,periodically reporting is recommended.
Based on the measurement control message received from the RNC, the UE periodically reports
the measurement quality of the target cell. Then, based on the measurement report, the RNC
makes the handover decision and performs handover.
If the reporting mode is periodically reporting : UE only test the inter-RAT neighbor RSSI only.
If the reporting mode is event trigger reporting : UE test the inter-RAT neighbor RSSI and current
cell Ec/No or RSCP ( depend on the 3A Measure Quantity ) .
214

Inter-RAT report mode
Parameter ID: InterRATReportMode
Inter-RAT period report interval
Parameter ID: InterRATPeriodReportInterval
Page149
Inter-RAT report mode
Parameter ID: InterRATReportMode
Value range :Periodical reporting, Event trigger
Content: This parameter specifies the inter-frequency measurement report mode.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/MOD

Inter-RAT period report interval
Parameter ID: InterRATPeriodReportInterval
Value range : NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000, 8000,
12000, 16000, 20000, 24000, 28000, 32000, 64000
The default value of this parameter is 1000 (500ms)
Content: This parameter specifies the interval of the inter-frequency measurement report.

215

Inter-RAT measure timer length
Parameter ID: InterRATMeasTime
The default value of this parameter is 60 (60 s)
3A Measure Quantity
Parameter ID: MeasQuantityOf3A
The default value of this parameter is Auto (based on the 2D)
Page150
Value range : 0 to 512 ,step 1s
Content: If no inter-RAT handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-RAT measurement timer,
the system stops the inter-RAT measurement and disables the compressed mode. If this
parameter is 0, the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer.
Set this parameter for handover based on coverage through ADD

CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERFREQHOCOV
3A Measure Quantity
Parameter ID: MeasQuantityOf3A
Value range : CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP, Auto
The default value of this parameter is Auto (based on the 2D)
Content: This parameter indicates the measurement value of the coverage-based inter-RAT
measurement in event-triggered measurement report mode.
When 3A Measure Quantity is set to Auto, the measure quantity of the used UTRAN
frequency is chosen the same as the measure quantity of the reporting 2D event that
triggered this inter-RAT measurement.

CELLINTERFREQHOCOV/SET INTERRATHOCOV
This parameter can be configured only when Inter-RAT report mode is set to
EVENT_TRIGGER.
216

z
Handover measurement
Event 3A is triggered on the basis of the following formula:
QUsed <= TUsed - H3a/2

MOtherRAT + CIOOtherRAT >= TOtherRAT + H3a/2
Page151
QUsed is the measurement value of the cell at the currently used frequency.
TUsed is the absolute quality threshold of the cell that uses the current frequency.
217

z
Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Parameter ID: UsedFreqCsThdEcN0
Inter-RAT CS handover decision THD
Parameter ID: TargetRatCsThd
The default value of this parameter is 16 (-95 dBm)
Page152
Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD
Parameter ID: UsedFreqCsThdEcN0
Content: If CS service inter-RAT handover uses the event-triggered measurement report
mode, event 3A is triggered only when the Ec/No value of the used frequency is lower than
this threshold.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV/SET
INTERRATHOCOV
Parameter ID: TargetRatCsThd
The default value of this parameter is 16 (-95 dBm)
Content: This parameter indicates the requirement of CS service inter-RAT handover for the
quality of inter-RAT cells.
If the event-triggered measurement report mode is used, event 3A may be triggered when
the quality of the target frequency is higher than this threshold. In periodical measurement
report mode, this parameter is used to evaluate the coverage-based inter-RAT handover on
the RNC side.
The value 0 means that the physical value is smaller than 110 dBm. .
INTERRATHOCOV
218

3A Event default setting
Used cell
Target cell
CS Ec/No threshold
-12dB
-95dBm
PS Ec/No threshold
-13dB
H Ec/No threshold
-13dB
CS RSCP threshold
-97dBm
PS RSCP threshold
-107dBm
H RSCP threshold
-107dBm
-95dBm
Page153
219

z
3A hysteresis
The default value of this parameter is 4(2 dB)
Page154
3A hysteresis
Value range 0 to 15 , step 0.5dB
The default value of this parameter is 4 (2 dB)
Content: This parameter specifies the event 3A trigger hysteresis, which is related to
slow fading. The greater the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of
triggered in time .
Value range :D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320,
D640, D1280, D2560, D5000
The default value of this parameter is 0 ( 0ms )
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 3A trigger delay, which is related
misjudgment. In this case, however, the event responds to the changes of measured
signals at a lower speed.

220

z
Cell Individual Offset
Parameter ID: CIO
Neigbhoring cell oriented CIO
zCell
Page155
Individual Offset
Parameter ID: CIO
Value range 50 to 50 , step 1dB
Content: This parameter cooperates with the Neighboring cell oriented CIO
in inter-RAT handover decision. The larger the sum, the higher the handover
priority of the GSM cell. The smaller the sum, the lower the handover priority
of the GSM cell.
Set this parameter through ADD GSMCELL/MOD GSMCELL
zNeigbhoring
cell oriented CIO
Value range :50 to 50 , step 1dB
The default value of this parameter is 0 (0 dB)
Content: This parameter is used in inter-RAT handover decision. The larger
the parameter, the higher the handover priority of the GSM cell. The smaller
the parameter, the lower the handover priority of the GSM cell .
Set this parameter through ADD GSMNCELL/MOD GSMNCELL
221
Coverage-based Inter-RAT handover

Page156
The coverage-based handover decision is categorized into two types according to the
following two measurement report modes: periodical measurement report mode and
event-triggered measurement report mode. Each mode corresponds to a different decision
and execution procedure.
222

z

The target cell must meet the requirement
Mother_RAT + CIOother_RAT Tother_RAT + H/2
NOTE: No consideration of the current cell
Page157
Mother_RAT is the measurement result of inter-RAT handover received by the RNC.
CIOother_RAT is the cell individual offset value of the target cell. It is equal to the sum of Cell
oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neigbhoring cell oriented CIO. Neigbhoring cell oriented
CIO indicates the offset of the measurement cell relative to the best cell.
Tother_RAT is the decision threshold of inter-RAT hard handover.

Based on the service type (CS or PS service) and measurement quantity (CPICH Ec/No or RSCP),
this threshold can be configured through the following parameters:
Inter-RAT R99 PS handover decision THD
Inter-RAT H handover decision THD
NOTE:
These thresholds are the same as the quality threshold of event 3A.
z
For H is the inter-RAT handover hysteresis value Inter-RAT hysteresis.
Select the cells in sequence, that is, from high quality cells to low quality ones, to initiate UMTS-toGSM handover in the cells where the handover time-to-trigger timer expires.
The length of the time-to-trigger timer is configured through the parameter Time to trigger for
verified GSM cell (with BSIC acknowledged) or the parameter Time to trigger for non-verified
GSM cell (with BSIC unacknowledged).
223

z
Time to trigger for verified GSM cell
Parameter ID: TimeToTrigForVerify
The default value of this parameter is 0 (0 ms)
Time to trigger for non-verified GSM cell
Parameter ID: TimeToTrigForNonVerify
The default value of this parameter is 65535 (never)
Inter-RAT hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystforInterRAT
Page158
Time to trigger for verified GSM cell
Parameter ID : TimeToTrigForVerify
Value range 0 to 64000, step:1ms
The default value of this parameter is 0 (0 ms)
Content: This parameter specifies the delay time for triggering a GSM cell with BSIC acknowledged.
In the period specified by this parameter, if the signal quality of an adjacent GSM cell meets the
requirement of inter-RAT handover, and this cell is acknowledged, the network will start inter-RAT
handover.

INTERRATHOCOV
Time to trigger for non-verified GSM cell
Parameter ID: TimeToTrigForNonVerify
Value range 0 to 64000 , 65535 , step:1ms
The default value of this parameter is 65535 (never)
Content: This parameter specifies the delay time for triggering a GSM cell with BSIC unacknowledged.
In the period specified by this parameter, if the signal quality of an adjacent GSM cell meets the
requirement of inter-RAT handover, and this cell is unacknowledged, the network will start inter-RAT
handover.
The value 65535 means that the RNC does not perform handover to an unacknowledged GSM cell. .

INTERRATHOCOV
Inter-RAT hysteresis
Parameter ID: HystforInterRAT
Value range 0 to 15 , step:0.5dB
Content: This parameter determines whether to trigger inter-RAT handover decision together with the
quality threshold. The smaller the shadow fading, the smaller the value of this parameter.

INTERRATHOCOV
224

Based on the event 3A
Page159
After receiving the event 3A measurement report of GSM cells, the RNC performs the
following decision and execution procedures:
z
Put all the GSM cells that trigger event 3A into a cell set and arrange the cells according
to the measurement quality in descending order.
Select the cells in sequence from the cell set to perform inter-RAT handover.
225
Contents
Page160
226
Procedure of QoS-based inter-RAT handover :
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover measurement,
handover decision, and handover execution.
Besides the triggering step, the rest 3 steps are the same with Coverage-based inter-RAT handover
z

If the service quality of the current cell deteriorates, the Link Stability Control Algorithm makes a handover
measurement decision.

The RNC requests the NodeB and the UE to start the compressed mode to measure the qualities of interfrequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells. Then, the RNC sends measurement control messages for
inter-frequency measurement and inter-RAT measurement
In the measurement phase, the method of periodical measurement report or event-triggered measurement
report can be used.

After the UE reports event 3A, the RNC performs the handover. Otherwise, the UE periodically
generates measurement reports, and the RNC makes a decision after evaluation.In the
execution phase
Note :
About Link Stability Control Algorithm :
When the uplink transmit power of the UE or downlink transmitted code power of the NodeB exceeds the
associated threshold :
z
For AMR, a fixed sequence of rate downsizing, inter-frequency handover, and then inter-RAT handover
are performed,
for VP ,inter-frequency handover are performed,
For BE service, rate downsizing, inter-frequency handover, and then inter-RAT handover are performed
according to the configured sequence
227
Parameters of inRAT-frequency handover
InterRAT Handover Switch based on Uplink Traffic AMR
Parameter ID: UlQoSAmrInterRATHoSwitch
InterRAT Handover Switch based on Downlink Traffic AMR
Parameter ID: DlQoSAmrInterRATHoSwitch
zInterRAT
Handover Switch based on Uplink/Downlink Traffic AMR
Parameter ID : UlQoSAmrInterRATHoSwitch/
Page162
DlQoSAmrInterRATHoSwitch
Value range NO, YES
Content: If the value of this parameter is YES, inter-RAT handover can be
executed on the basis of the downlink/uplink QoS of AMR services.
228

Parameter ID: BeUlAct1/ BeUlAct2/ BeUlAct3
Parameter ID: BeDlAct1/ BeDlAct2/ BeDlAct3
Page163
Parameter ID : BeUlAct1/ BeUlAct2/ BeUlAct3
Content: This parameter defines the action sequence to enhance the Uplink QoS of
BE services .
Parameter ID : BeDlAct1/ BeDlAct2/ BeDlAct3
Content: This parameter defines the action sequence to enhance the downlink QoS
of BE services .
229

Parameter ID: DLQoSMcTimerLen
Parameter ID: UpQoSMcTimerLen
3A Used-Freq Measure Quantity for QoS
Parameter ID: UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQoS3A
The default value of this parameter is CPICH_RSCP

Page164
These two parameters are shared by QoS based inter-frequency and QoS based
inter-RAT handover:
Set these parameters through ADD CELLQOSHO/MOD CELLQOSHO/SET

QOSHO
3A Used-Freq Measure Quantity for QoS
Parameter ID : UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQoS3A
Value range CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP
The default value of this parameter is CPICH_RSCP
Content: This parameter indicates the measurement quantity used in QoS-based

UMTS-to-GSM measurement in event-triggered reporting mode.
If the coverage and QoS-based UMTS-to-GSM handovers are triggered

simultaneously, the RNC distributes QoS-based measurement parameters.
230
Contents
Page165
231
Procedure of Load-based inter-RAT handover :
The handover procedure is divided into three phases: handover triggering, handover decision,
and handover execution
z

When the load of the UMTS cell that the UE accesses is higher than the related threshold, the
Load Reshuffling (LDR) algorithm makes a handover decision.

The RNC enables the compressed mode and starts the inter-RAT handover measurement.

After the UE reports event 3C, the RNC makes a handover decision.

Based on the service ARP, Traffic class, Channel type(R99, HSDPA), RNC will choose the users
with lower priority to execute handover .
232

The default value of this parameter is 60 s
Page167
Parameter ID : InterRATMeasTime
Value range 0 to 512
Content: If no inter-RAT handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-RAT
measurement timer, the system stops the inter-RAT measurement and disables the
compressed mode. If this parameter is 0, the system does not start the inter-RAT
measurement timer.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV/MOD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV/SET INTERRATHONCOV
233
Load-based inter-RAT handover

3C EVENT
MOtherRAT + CIOOtherRAT >= TOtherRAT + H3c/2
Page168
MOtherRAT is the measurement value of the cell (in another RAT) in the reporting range.
CIOOtherRAT is the cell individual offset value of the cell (in another RAT) in the reporting
range, which is equal to the sum of Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset and Neighboring
cell oriented CIO.
TOtherRAT is the absolute inter-RAT handover threshold. Based on the service type (CS , PS
domain R99 service, or PS domain HSPA service), this threshold can be configured through
the following parameters:
Inter-RAT R99 PS handover decision THD

H3c is 3C hysteresis, the hysteresis value of event 3C.
For the PS and CS combined services, the threshold(s) for CS services is (are) used.
When the conditions for event 3C are met and the delay requirement specified by the 3C
event trigger delay time parameter can be satisfied, the UE sends the measurement
report of event 3C.
234

Parameter ID: InterRATNCovHOCSTh
The default value of this parameter is 21 (-90dBm)
Inter-RAT PS handover decision THD
Parameter ID: InterRATNCovHOPSThd
Page169
Parameter ID : InterRATNCovHOCSTh
Value range 0 to 63 ,step:1dB
Content: This parameter is used to set measurement control on the event 3C. The
event 3C is triggered when the quality of the target frequency is higher than this
threshold. Note that the value 0 means the physical value is smaller than -110 dBm .

Inter-RAT PS handover decision THD
Parameter ID : InterRATNCovHOPSTh
Value range 0 to 63 ,step:1dB
Content: This parameter is used to set measurement control on the event 3C. The
event 3C is triggered when the quality of the target frequency is higher than this
threshold. Note that the value 0 means the physical value is smaller than -110 dBm .

235

3C hysteresis
Page170
3C hysteresis
Parameter ID : Hystfor3C
Value range 0 to 15 ,step:0.5 dB
Content: This parameter specifies the event 3C trigger hysteresis, which is related to slow
fading . The larger the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of ping-pong effect
and decision mistakes. In this case, however, event 3C cannot be triggered in time .

Parameter ID : TrigTime3C
D1280, D2560, D5000
Content: This parameter specifies the time of event 3C trigger delay, which is related to
slow fading. The larger the value of this parameter, the smaller the probability of decision
mistakes. In this case, however, event 3C responds to the changes of measured signals more
slowly.

236
Load-based inter-RAT handover

z
Decision and Execution Procedure
Decision
3C Event
load information interchanging between the 3G and 2G cell
Execution
Page171
After receiving the event 3C measurement report of GSM cells, the RNC performs the
following handover decision and execution procedure:
Put all the GSM cells that trigger event 3C into a cell set and arrange the cells
according to the measurement quality in descending order.
Select the cells in sequence from the cell set.
The load status between the source cell and the target cell can be acquired by
interchanging load information between a UMTS cell and a GSM cell during the
load-based and service-based UMTS-to-GSM handover. Thus, whether to further
conduct the handover can be determined to avoid the 2G cell overload and
possible handover to the congested cell.
237
The procedure of load information interchanging between the 3G source cell and 2G target cell
is described as follows:
When the RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED message to the 3G CN,
If the switch Send Load Info to GSM Ind is set to ON, the RELOCATION
REQUIRED message includes the load information of the 3G source cell.
If the switch Send Load Info to GSM Ind is set to OFF, then the RELOCATION
REQUIRED message does not include the Information
When the RNC receives the RELOCATION COMMAND message from the 2G CN,
If the switch NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load is set to ON, the RNC
obtains the load information of the 2G target cell by reading the RELOCATION
COMMAND message.
If the 2G load is lower than CS domain Reloc GSM load THD (for CS
service), or if the 2G load is lower than PS domain Reloc GSM load THD
(for PS service), the RNC continues the inter-RAT handover procedure;
otherwise, the RNC returns the RELOCATION CANCEL message to the
CN to cancel this inter-RAT handover and makes another handover
attempt to the next candidate cell generated in the cell list based on interRAT measurement.
If the load information of the 2G target cell is not included in the
RELOCATION COMMAND message, the load information of the 2G target
cell is not considered and this inter-RAT handover is continued.
If the switch NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load is set to OFF, the RNC
continues the inter-RAT handover procedure without considering the thresholds.
238

Send Load Info to GSM Ind
Parameter ID: SndLdInfo2GsmInd
The default value of this parameter is ON
NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load
Parameter ID: NcovHoOn2GldInd
Page173
Send Load Info to GSM Ind
Parameter ID : SndLdInfo2GsmInd
Value range ON, OFF
Content:
When the parameter is set to ON, the RNC sends UMTS cell load
information to the GSM CN during the non-coverage based system
relocation in or out process.
When the parameter is set to OFF, the RNC does not send UMTS cell load
information to the GSM during the system relocation in or out process.
Set this parameter through SET INTERRATHONCOV
NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load
Parameter ID : NcovHoOn2GldInd
Value range ON, OFF
Content:
When the parameter is set to ON, the RNC stops the non-coverage
based system relocation out process if the GSM cell load exceeds the
CS dormain Reloc GSM load THD or PS dormain Reloc GSM load
THD.
When the parameter is set to OFF, the RNC continues the system
relocation out process without considering the thresholds. This
parameter specifies the time of event 3C trigger delay, which is related
to slow fading. The larger the value of this parameter, the smaller the
probability of decision mistakes. In this case, however, event 3C
responds to the changes of measured signals more slowly.
239

CS domain Reloc GSM load THD
Parameter ID: CSHOOut2GLoadThd
The default value of this parameter is 80 (80%)
PS domain Reloc GSM load THD
Parameter ID: PSHOOut2GLoadThd
Page174
CS domain Reloc GSM load THD
Parameter ID : CSHOOut2GLoadThd
Value range 0 to 100 ,step:1%
Content:
PS domain Reloc GSM load THD
Parameter ID : PSHOOut2GLoadThd
Value range 0 to 100 ,step:1%
Content:
240

Inter-RAT handover max attempt times
Parameter ID: InterRATHOAttempts
Page175
Inter-RAT handover max attempt times
Parameter ID : InterRATHOAttempts
Value range 1 to 16
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of attempts of load-based
and service-based inter-RAT handover.
CELLINTERRATHONCOV/SET INTERRATHONCOV
241
Contents
Page176
242
Procedure of Service-based inter-RAT handover :
The handover procedure is divided into four phases: handover triggering, handover measurement
handover decision, and handover execution
z

When a service is established (RAB Assignment ), If the Service Handover Indicator is set to
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM, the RNC requests the handover to the GSM

The RNC enables the compressed mode and starts the inter-RAT handover measurement.

After the UE reports event 3C, the RNC makes a handover decision.

service type is defined by parameters on cell level:

Inter-RAT CS handover switch and Inter-RAT PS handover switch
When a single CS service is initially set up by the UE, the RNC allows the UMTS-to-GSM
service-based handover if Inter-RAT CS handover switch is set to ON.
When a single PS service is initially set up by the UE, the RNC allows the UMTS-to-GSM
service-based handover if Inter-RAT PS handover switch is set to ON.
For the CS and PS combined services, no service-based handover is trigged
service handover indicator assigned by the Core Network. Only the services with the indicator
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM can trigger Service-based inter-RAT handover
243

z
Inter-RAT CS handover switch
Inter-RAT PS handover switch
Parameter ID:
CSServiceHOSwitch
PSServiceHOSwitch
Inter-RAT CS handover switch
Inter-RAT PS handover switch
Page178
Parameter ID :
CSServiceHOSwitch
PSServiceHOSwitch
Value range ON, OFF
Content:
This parameter indicates whether the cell allows the service-based

inter-RAT handover for the CS or PS services
Set this parameter through ADD CELLHOCOMM/MOD CELLHOCOMM
244
Contents
Page179
245
UMTS-to-GSM Multimedia Fallback
VP service:
speech
videos
AMR service:
speech
WCDMA
VP
AMR
GSM
AMR
Page180
Compared with the traditional speech service of the GSM, the VP service of the UMTS
can transmit not only speech services but also the images and videos captured by
both parties
For the UMTS-to-GSM handover, network-initiated multimedia fallback on the following
occasions:
z
The RNC decides to send an inter-RAT handover request after receiving periodical
measurement reports or event 1F, 3A, or 3C.
The service is combined with a VP, and the "Alternative RAB Para" in the RAB
ASSIGNMENT message is a valid AMR speech format.
246
Procedure of Multimedia Fallback
The procedure for the fallback service is described as follows:

z
In the service set up stage, the CN sends the SRNC a RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT
REQUIREMENT message to set up the VP service. The message includes the "Alternative
RAB Para" that has QoS parameters required for setting up the speech service.
During UMTS-to-GSM handover, the SRNC sends a RANAP MODIFY REQUEST message to
change the VP service to the AMR speech service. In the 3GPP R6 protocol, the Alternative
RAB Configuration is also added to the RAB MODIFY REQUEST message, which enables
the RNC to request the CN to change the VP service to the AMR speech service.
The MSC initiates the Bearer Capability (BC) negotiation with the UE.
After the negotiation is modified, the RNC is informed of performing service change. The
multimedia fallback ends when the service change is completed.
When the multimedia fallback ends, the RNC decides whether to perform the UMTS-to-GSM
handover according to the current measurements reported by the UE.
At the beginning of the service setup, the RNC saves the RAB Para and "Alternative RAB Para"
in the RAB ASSIGNMENT or REQUEST RELOCATION REQUEST message. This makes
preparations for notifying the CN of changing the VP service to the AMR speech service.
The CN initiates the RAB reconfiguration to inform the two calling parties of performing the
multimedia fallback. The multimedia fallback of the calling party is consistent with that of the
called party. The single VP service falls back to the single AMR speech service. The multiRAB service combined with VP falls back to the multi-RAB service combined with AMR. If the
multimedia fallback succeeds, that is, the video phone in the service falls back to speech
successfully, the inter-RAT handover is initiated. Otherwise, the inter-RAT handover fails.
247
Contents
Page182
248
PS UMTS-to-GSM Handover with

NACC
z
What is NACC?
Network Assisted Cell Change
What is the use of NACC
To reduce the delay of PS UMTS-to-GSM handover
Page183
Normal PS is realized by cell reselection, the time delay can not be guaranteed. But
Some PS services have requirements for the delay. If the handover takes too long,
TCP may start slowly or data transmission of the stream service may be
interrupted due to the overflow of the UE buffer.
The introduction of NACC enables the system information exchange between BSS
and RAN , Thus the inter-system delay in PS domains, can be reduced.
With NACC, the RNC sends the cell change order to the UE, which contains the GSM
EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) system information, when the UMTS-toGSM handover in the PS domain is triggered.
249
Procedure of NACC
After the SRNC receives a measurement report from the UE, the UE is reselected
to the GERAN cell according to the decision.
The SRNC sends a RAN INFORMATION REQUEST message to the SGSN.
The SGSN forwards the message to the corresponding BSS.
The BSS sends a GERAN SI/PSI message to the SRNC via the SGSN. RAN
INFORMATION message can either be On-demand (single report) or Onmodification (multiple reports).
The SGSN forwards the report message to the SRNC through Iu interface.
If there are several report messages, the SRNC terminates reporting by the
TERMINATION/END message.
To enable the NACC function, do as follows:
Run the SET CORRMALGOSWITCH command to set

PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH to ON.
Run the ADD GSMCELL/MOD GSMCELL command to set Inter-RAT cell

support RIM indicator to TRUE.
250

PS 3G to 2G Cell change order NACC Switch
Parameter ID: PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH
Inter-RAT cell support RIM indicator
Parameter ID: SuppRIMFlag
zPS
3G to 2G Cell change order NACC Switch
Parameter ID : PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH
Page185
Value range OFF, ON
Content: When it is checked, and inter-RAT handover of the PS domain
from UTRAN use cell change order method, inter-RAT handover support
NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) function.
zInter-RAT
Parameter ID: SuppRIMFlag
cell support RIM indicator
Value range FALSE, TRUE
The default value of this parameter FALSE
Content: The parameter indicates whether the inter-RAT cell supports RIM.
Set this parameter through ADD GSMCELL/MOD GSMCELL
251
Contents
Page186
252
UMTS to GSM Handover Retry

z
In case of event triggered inter-RAT handover failure, if the cause

of the failure is not a configuration failure and the retry timer
expires, the handover attempts to the cell again until the retry
number exceeds the maximum retry number
Page187
253
UMTS to GSM Handover Retry

z
Parameters
3A event retry period
Parameter ID: PeriodFor3A
3A event retry max times
Parameter ID: AmntOfRpt3A
The default value of this parameter is 63 (infinity)
Parameter ID: PeriodFor3C
Parameter ID: AmntOfRpt3C
3A event retry period
3A event retry max times
Page188
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV / MOD

CELLINTERRATHOCOV / SET INTERRATHOCOV
Set this parameter through ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV / MOD

CELLINTERRATHONCOV / SET INTERRATHONCOV
254
Contents
Page189
255
Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover
The signaling procedures for PS and CS inter-RAT handover

are different:
UMTS-to-GSM Handover in CS Domain
UMTS to GSM Handover in PS Domain
Page190
256
257

1.
The SRNC sends the 3G MSC a RANAP message RELOCATION REQUIRED if

the condition of inter-RAT outgoing handover is met.
2.
As indicated in the received message, the 3G MSC forwards this request to the 2G
MSC on the MAP/E interface through a MAP message PREPARE HANDOVER.
3.
The 2G MSC forwards the request to the BSC. The message shown in the figure is
for reference only and is subject to the actual condition of the GSM.
4.
The BSC responds to this request. The message shown in the figure is for reference
only and is subject to the actual condition of the GSM.
5.
Once the initial procedures are completed in the 2G MSC/BSS, the 2G MSC returns
a MAP/E message PREPARE HANDOVER RESPONSE.
6.
The 3G MSC sends the SRNC a RANAP message RELOCATION COMMAND.
7.
The SRNC sends the UE an RRC message HANDOVER FROM UTRAN through
the existing RRC connection. This message may include information from one or
several other systems.
8.
The BSC performs handover detection. The figure does not show such procedures
as GSM BSS synchronization. The message shown in the figure is for reference
only and is subject to the actual condition of the GSM.
9.
The UE sends the BSC a HANDOVER COMPLETE message.
10.
The BSC sends the MSC a HANDOVER COMPLETE message. The message
shown in the figure is for reference only and is subject to the actual condition of the
GSM.
11.
After detecting the UE in the coverage area of the GSM, the MSC sends the CN a
MAP/E message SEND END SIGNAL REQUEST.
12.
The CN sends the former SRNC an IU RELEASE COMMAND message, requesting

the former SRNC to release the allocated resource.
13.
After the bearer resource is released in the UMTS, the former SRNC sends the CN
an IU RELEASE COMPLETE message.
14.
After the call ends, the CN sends the MSC a MAP/E message SEND END SIGNAL
RESPONSE.
258
UMTS-to-GSM Handover in PS Domain
The signal quality of the WCDMA cell where the UE camps on is dissatisfactory or the load of
the serving cell is heavy.
When the UE is in CELL_DCH state, the UTRAN sends a CELL CHANGE ORDER message to
the UE to perform a handover to GSM by cell reselection.
The NodeB sends a RADIO LINK FAILURE INDICATION message, because the UE shuts down
transmission towards the WCDMA cell after cell reselection to a GSM cell.
After the UE accesses a GSM cell, the SGSN directly sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND
message to the SRNC, if the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context does not need to be
transferred.
259

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
The UE in CELL_DCH state or the UTRAN (when the UE is in CELL_FACH state)

decides to initiate an inter-RAT handover in the PS domain to hand over the UE to a
new GSM cell and stop the data transmission between the UE and the network.
The UE sends a ROUTING AREA UPDATE REQUEST message to the 2G SGSN.
The Update Type in the message indicates RA update, combined RA/LA update, or
combined RA/LA update with IMSI attach. The BSS adds the CGI including the RAC
and LAC of the cell to the received message before forwarding the message to a
new 2G SGSN.
The new 2G SGSN sends an SGSN CONTEXT REQUEST message to the old 3G
SGSN to obtain the MM and PDP contexts. The old 3G SGSN validates the old PTMSI Signature. If the old P-TMSI Signature is valid, the old 3G SGSN starts a timer.
Otherwise, the old 3G SGSN responds with an error cause.
If the UE stays in connected mode before handover, the old 3G SGSN sends an
SRNS CONTEXT REQUEST message. After receiving this message, the SRNS
buffers the DPUs, stops sending the PDUs to the UE, and sends an SRNS
CONTEXT RESPONSE message to the old 3G SGSN.
The old 3G SGSN sends an SGSN CONTEXT RESPONSE message to the 2G
SGSN, including the MM and PDP contexts.
The security functions can be executed.
The new 2G SGSN sends an SGSN CONTEXT ACKNOWLEDGE message to the
old 3G SGSN. This informs the old 3G SGSN that the new 2G SGSN is ready to
receive the PDUs belonging to the activated PDP contexts.
The old 3G SGSN sends a DATA FORWARD COMMAND message to the SRNS.
The SRNS starts a data-forwarding timer and sends the buffered PDUs to the old
3G SGSN.
The old 3G SGSN tunnels the GTP PDUs to the new 2G SGSN. In the PDUs, the
sequence numbers in the GTP header remain unchanged.
The new 2G SGSN sends an UPDATE PDP CONTEXT REQUEST message to
each related GGSN. Each GGSN sends an UPDATE PDP CONTEXT RESPONSE
message after updating its PDP context fields.
The new 2G SGSN sends an UPDATE GPRS LOCATION message, requesting the
HLR to modify the SGSN number.
The HLR sends a CANCEL LOCATION message to the old 3G SGSN. The old 3G
SGSN responds with a CANCEL LOCATION ACK message. After the timer expires,
the old 3G SGSN removes the MM and PDP contexts.
The old 3G SGSN sends an IU RELEASE COMMAND message to the SRNS. After
the data-forwarding timer expires, the SRNS responds with an IU RELEASE
COMPLETE message.
260

14.
The HLR sends an INSERT SUBSCRIBER DATA message to the new 2G SGSN.
The 2G SGSN constructs an MM context and PDP contexts for the UE and returns
an INSERT SUBSCRIBER DATA ACK message to the HLR.
15.
The HLR sends an UPDATE GPRS LOCATION ACK message to the new 2G
SGSN.
16.
If the association has to be established, the new 2G SGSN sends a LOCATION

UPDATE REQUEST message to the VLR. The VLR stores the SGSN number for
creating or updating the association.
17.
If the subscriber data in the VLR is marked as not confirmed by the HLR, the new
VLR informs the HLR. The HLR cancels the old VLR and inserts subscriber data in
the new VLR.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The new VLR sends an UPDATE LOCATION message to the HLR.

The HLR cancels the data in the old VLR by sending a CANCEL
LOCATION message to the old VLR.
The old VLR acknowledges the message by responding with a
CANCEL LOCATION ACK message.
The HLR sends an INSERT SUBSCRIBER DATA message to the
new VLR.
The new VLR acknowledges the message by responding with an
INSERT SUBSCRIBER DATA ACK message.
The HLR responds with a UPDATE LOCATION ACK message to the

new VLR.
The new VLR allocates a new TMSI and responds with a LOCATION UPDATE
6.
18.
ACCEPT message to the 2G SGSN.

19.
The new 2G SGSN checks the presence of the MS in the new RA. If all checks are
successful, the new 2G SGSN constructs the MM and PDP contexts for the MS. A
logical link is established between the new 2G SGSN and the UE. The 2G SGSN
responds to the UE with a ROUTING AREA UPDATE ACCEPT message.
20.
The UE acknowledges the new P-TMSI by returning a ROUTING AREA UPDATE

COMPLETE message, including all PDUs successfully sent to the UE before the
routing area update procedure.
21.
The new 2G SGSN sends a TMSI REALLOCATION COMPLETE message to the

new VLR if the UE confirms the VLR TMSI.
22.
The 2G SGSN and the BSS perform the BSS PACKET FLOW CONTEXT
procedure.
261
Thank you
www.huawei.com
262
WCDMA Load Control

www.huawei.com
The WCDMA system is a self interference system. As the load of the WCDMA system
increases, the interference rises. A relatively high interference may affect the coverage
and Quality of Service (QoS) of established services. Therefore, capacity, coverage and
QoS of the WCDMA system are mutually affected. The purpose of load control is to
maximize the system capacity while ensuring coverage and QoS.
Objectives
z
Know load control principles
Know load control realization methods in WCDMA system
Know load control parameters in WCDMA system
Contents
1. Load Control Overview
2. Load Control Algorithms
Contents
1.1 Load Control Algorithms Overview
1.2 Load Measurement
1.3 Priorities Involved in Load Control
Load Definition
z
Load: the occupancy of capacity
Two kinds of capacity in WCDMA system
Hard capacity
Cell DL OVSF Code
NodeB Transport resource
NodeB processing capability (NodeB credit)
Soft capacity
Cell Power (UL and DL)
WCDMA network load can be defined by 4 factors:

1,Power ,include DL transmitting power of cell and increased UL interference (RTWP).
2,DL OVSF code of a cell
3,DL and UL NodeB processing capability which is defined by NodeB credit.
4,Iub transmission bandwidth of a NodeB
The power resource is related to the mobility, distribution of the UE and also effected by
the radio conditions. Therefore, for a fixed power resource, the numbers of service can
be supported is not a fix result. We believe the UL and DL power resources are soft.
The Objectives of Load Control

z
Keeping system stable
Maximizing system capacity while ensuring coverage and

QoS
Realize different priorities for different service and different

user
WCDMA network load can be defined by 4 factors:

1,Power ,include DL transmitting power of cell and increased UL interference (RTWP).
2,DL OVSF code of a cell
3,DL and UL NodeB processing capability which is defined by NodeB credit.
4,Iub transmission bandwidth of a NodeB
The power resource is related to the mobility, distribution of the UE and also effected
by the radio conditions. Therefore, for a fixed power resource, the numbers of service
can be supported is not a fix result. We believe the UL and DL power resources are
soft.
Load Control Algorithms

z
The load control algorithms are applied to the different

UE access phases as follows:
PUC: Potential User Control
CAC: Call Admission Control
IAC: Intelligent Admission Control
LDB : Intra-frequency Load Balancing
LDR: Load Reshuffling
OLC: Overload Control
The load control algorithms are applied to the different UE access phases as follows:
Before UE access: Potential User Control (PUC)
During UE access: Intelligent Access Control (IAC) and Call Admission Control (CAC)
After UE access: intra-frequency Load Balancing (LDB), Load Reshuffling (LDR), and
Overload Control (OLC)

Load control algorithm in the WCDMA system
The load control algorithms are built into the RNC. The input of load control comes
from the RNC and measurement information of the NodeB.
RNC can calculate hard resource load, that is OVSF ,NodeB credit, Iub occupancy.
The soft load need the NodeB reporting.
Contents
Soft Load Measurement

The major measurement objects of the load measurement
Uplink Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP)
UL Load
Received scheduled Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH)

power share (RSEPS)
E-DCH Provided Bit Rate
TCP
Non-HSPA TCP
DL Load
HSDPA PBR
HSDPA GBP
The soft load control algorithms use load measurement values in the uplink and the
downlink. A common Load Measurement (LDM) algorithm is required to control load
measurement in the uplink and the downlink.
The NodeB and the RNC perform measurements and filtering in accordance with the
parameter settings. The statistics obtained after the measurements and filtering serve
as the data input for the load control algorithms.
The major measurement objects of the LDM are as follows:
Uplink Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP)
Received scheduled Enhanced Dedicated Channel (E-DCH) power share (RSEPS)
E-DCH Provided Bit Rate
Downlink Transmitted Carrier Power (TCP)
TCP of all codes not used for High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HSPDSCH), High Speed Shared Control Channel (Non-HSPA TCP)
Provided Bit Rate on HS-DSCH (PBR)
HS-DSCH required power also called Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) required power
(GBP)
Load Measurement procedure
Smooth Window Filtering on the RNC Side

N 1
P ( n) =
n i
i =0
N : the size of the smooth window
Pn : the reported measurement value
Based on the measurement parameters set on the NodeB Local Maintenance Terminal
(LMT), the NodeB measures the major measurement quantities and then obtains
original measurement values. After layer 3 filtering on the NodeB side, the NodeB
reports the cell measurement values to the RNC.
Based on the measurement parameters set on the RNC LMT, the RNC performs
smooth filtering on the measurement values reported from the NodeB and then obtains
the measurement values, which further serve as data input for the load control
algorithms.
Filtering on the NodeB Side
A is the sampling value of the measurement.

B is the measurement value after layer 1 filtering.
C is the measurement value after layer 3 filtering ,which is the reported measurement
value
Layer 1 filtering is not standardized by protocols and it depends on vendor equipment.
Layer 3 filtering is standardized. The filtering effect is controlled by a higher layer.
The interval at which the NodeB reports each measurement quantity to the RNC is
configured by the Time unit and Report cycle on RNC LMT: SET LDM
The report interval = Time unit * Report cycle
By default, Time unit for all measurement are set to 10ms ;Report cycle for
RTWP is 100, that is 1s; Report cycle for TCP and Non HSPA TCP is 20 ,that is
200ms ;Report cycle for HSDPA GBP is 10, that is 100 ms; Report cycle for
HSDPA PBR is 10, that is 100 ms
Smooth Window Filtering on the RNC Side
After the RNC receives the measurement report, it filters the measurement value
with the smooth window.
Assuming that the reported measurement value is Qn and that the size of the
smooth window is N, the filtered measurement value is :
Delay susceptibilities of PUC, CAC, LDBLDR, and OLC to common measurement

are different. The LDM algorithm must apply different smooth filter coefficients and
measurement periods to those algorithms , on RNC LMT, we can set the smooth
window length for different algorithms by SET LDM:
The following table lists the parameters :
Parameter Name
Parameter ID
Value
Range
default
Value
PUC moving average

filter length
PucAvgFilterLen
1 to 32
32
LDB moving average

filter length
LdbAvgFilterLen
1 to 32
32
UL LDR moving average

filter length
UlLdrAvgFilterLen
1 to 32
25
DL LDR moving average

filter length
DlLdrAvgFilterLen
1 to 32
25
UL CAC moving average

filter length
UlCACAvgFilterLen
1 to 32
DL CAC moving average

filter length
DlCACAvgFilterLen
1 to 32
UL OLC moving average

filter length
UlOLCAvgFilterLen
1 to 32
25
DL OLC moving average

filter length
DlOLCAvgFilterLen
1 to 32
25
Smooth window for GBP for all related algorithms are the same and the default setting is 1
Contents
Priority
z
The service of user with low priority will be affected by the

load control algorithms first
Three kinds of priorities
User Priority
RAB Integrate Priority
User Integrate Priority
User Priority: mainly applying to provide different QoS for different users. Eg., setting
different GBR according to the user priority for BE service. No consideration about the
service.
RAB Integrate Priority: Priority of a service, related to the service type, and the user
priority of the user.
User Integrate Priority: Only used for multi-RAB user ,it is a temporary priority of an
ongoing-service user.
User Priority
z
There are three levels of user priority
gold (high), silver (middle) and copper (low) user
User priority
Gold
Silver
Copper
Uplink
128kbps 64kbps 32kbps
Downlink
128kbps 64kbps 32kbps
gold
user
Pay $100
for 3G
services
In CN HLR, we can set ARP (Allocation Retention Priority ), during service setup, CN
sends ARP to RNC .Based on the mapping relation( configured in RNC), RNC can
identify the user is a gold, silver or copper one.
The user priority affect GBR of BE service in RAN, Iub transmission management and so
on.
User Priority
z
The mapping relation between user priority and ARP

(Allocation/Retention Priority) is configured in RNC by SET
USERPRIORITY
The default relation is:
ARP
User
Priority
Gold
Silver
10 11
12 13
14
Copper
The user priority mapping can be configured in RNC by SET USERPRIORITY

ARP 15 is always the lowest priority and it cannot be configured. It corresponds to
copper.
If ARP is not received in messages from the Iu interface, the user priority is regarded as
copper.
15
RAB Integrate Priority

z
RAB Integrate Priority is mainly used in load control

algorithms
RAB Integrate Priority are set according to :
ARP
Traffic Class
THPfor interactive service only
HSPA or DCH
RAB Integrate Priority is mainly used in load control algorithms.

The values of RAB Integrate Priority are set according to the Integrate Priority
Configured Reference parameter as follows:
If Integrate Priority Configured Reference is set to Traffic Class, the integrate priority
abides by the following rules:
Traffic classes: conversational -> streaming -> interactive -> background =>
Services of the same class: Priority based on Allocation/Retention Priority (ARP)
values, that is, ARP1 -> ARP2 -> ARP3 -> ... -> ARP14 =>
Only for the interactive service of the same ARP value: priority based on Traffic
Handling Priority (THP, defined in CN , sent to RNC during service setup), that is,
THP1 -> THP2 -> THP3 -> ... -> THP14 =>
Services of the same ARP, class and THP (only for interactive services): High
Speed Packet Access (HSPA) or Dedicated Channel (DCH) service preferred
depending on the value of the Indicator of Carrier Type Priority parameter.
If Integrate Priority Configured Reference is set to ARP, the integrate priority abides by
the following rules:
ARP1 -> ARP2 -> ARP3 -> ... -> ARP14 =>
Traffic classes: conversational -> streaming -> interactive -> background =>
Only for the interactive service of the same ARP value: priority based on Traffic
Handling Priority (THP), that is, THP1 -> THP2 -> THP3 -> ... -> THP14 =>
Services of the same ARP, class and THP (only for interactive services): HSPA
or DCH service preferred depending on the value of the Indicator of Carrier
Type Priority parameter.
Integrate Priority Configured Reference and Indicator of Carrier Type
Priority are set by SET USERPRIORITY .
By default
Integrate Priority Configured Reference is set to ARP
Indicator of Carrier Type Priority is set to NONE, that means HSDPA and DCH
services have the same priority.
ARP and THP are carried in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message, and they are
not configurable on the RNC LMT.
Example for RAB Integrate Priority

Based on ARP, HSDPA priority is higher
Service ARP Traffic Class
ID
Services attribution in the cell
Service ARP
ID
Traffic Class
Bear
type
Interactive
HSDPA
Bear
type
Interactive
DCH
Conversational
DCH
Background
DCH
Interactive
DCH
Interactive
HSDPA
Conversational
DCH
Background
DCH
Based on Traffic Class, HSDPA priority is higher

Service
ID
Traffic Class
ARP
Bear
type
Conversational
DCH
Interactive
HSDPA
Interactive
DCH
Background
DCH
This example shows the RAB Integrate Priority calculation in 2 different conditions
User Integrate Priority

z
When the user has one RAB, User integrate priority is the
same as the RAB integrate priority
For multiple RAB users, the integrate priority of the user is

based on the service of the highest priority
When the user has one RAB, User integrate priority is the same as the service of the
RAB integrate priority;
For multiple RAB users, the integrate priority of the user is based on the service of the
highest priority.
User integrate priority is used in user-specific load control. For example, the selection of
R99 users during preemption, the selection of users during inter-frequency load
handover for LDR, and the selection of users during switching BE services to CCH are
performed according to the user integrate priority.
Key parameters of Priority

z
Integrate Priority Configured Reference
Parameter ID: PRIORITYREFERENCE
The default value of this parameter is ARP
Indicator of Carrier Type Priority
Parameter ID: CARRIERTYPEPRIORIND
The default value of this parameter is NONE
Integrate Priority Configured Reference

Parameter ID: PRIORITYREFERENCE
Value range: ARP, Traffic Class
Content: This parameter is used to set the criterion by which the priority is first sorted.
The default value of this parameter is ARP
Set this parameter through SET USERPRIORITY
Indicator of Carrier Type Priority
Parameter ID: CARRIERTYPEPRIORIND
Value range: NONE, DCH, HSPA
Content: This parameter is used to decide which carrier (DCH or HSPA) takes
precedence when ARP and Traffic Class are identical. When this parameter is set to
NONE, the bearing priority of services on the DCH is the same as that of HSPA
services.
The default value of this parameter is NONE,
Set this parameter through SET USERPRIORITY
Contents
2.1 PUC (Potential User Control)
2.2 LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)
2.3 CAC (Call Admission Control)
2.4 IAC (Intelligent Admission Control)
2.5 LDR (Load Reshuffling)
2.6 OLC (Overload Control)
PUC Principles
z
The Potential User Control (PUC) algorithm controls the

Inter-frequency cell reselection of the potential UE, and
prevents UE from camping on a heavily loaded cell.
Potential UE :
IDLE Mode UE
CELL-FACH UECELL-PCH UEURA-PCH UE
The function of PUC is to balance traffic load among inter-frequency cells. By modifying
cell selection and reselection parameters and broadcasting them through system
information, PUC leads UEs to cell with light load. The UE may be in idle mode,
Cell_FACH state, Cell _PCH state, URA_PCH state
PUC Load Judgment
Cell load for PUC is of three states: heavy, normal, and light
The RNC periodically monitors the downlink load of the cell and compares the
measurement results with the configured thresholds Load level division threshold 1 and
Load level division threshold 2, that is, load level division upper and lower thresholds.
If the cell load is higher than the load level division upper threshold plus the Load level
division hysteresis, the cell load is considered heavy.
If the cell load is lower than the load level division lower threshold minus the Load level
division hysteresis, the cell load is considered light.
Otherwise the cell load is considered normal
PUC Procedure
Threshold
Every 200ms
Cell TCP
Heavy?
Light?
Normal?
RNC
cell reselection
parameters
System information
NodeB
UE
Every 30 minutes
The parameters related to cell selection and cell reselection are Qoffset1(s,n) (load level
offset), Qoffset2(s,n) (load level offset), and Sintersearch (start threshold for interfrequency cell reselection).
The NodeB periodically reports the total TCP of the cell, and the PUC periodically triggers
the following activities:
Assessing the cell load level based on the total TCP
Configuring Sintersearch, Qoffset1(s,n), and Qoffset2(s,n) based on the cell load level
PUC can Modify inter-frequency cell reselection parameters based on the load:
1. Sintersearch :
when the load of a cell is Heavy, PUC will increase Sintersearch
when the load of a cell is Light, PUC will decrease Sintersearch
2. QOffset:
when the load of current cell is Heavy and neighbor is Non heavy, PUC will decrease
QOffset
when the load of current cell is Non heavy and neighbor is Heavy, PUC will increase
QOffset
Updating the parameters of system information SIB3 and SIB11
Load of Current Cell
Sintersearch
Light
S'intersearch = Sintersearch + Sintersearch offset 1
Normal
S'intersearch = Sintersearch
Heavy
S'intersearch = Sintersearch + Sintersearch offset 2
: indicates that the parameter value remains unchanged.

: indicates that the parameter value increases.
: indicates that the parameter value decreases.
Change of
Sintersearch
PUC Principles
Light load
Freq1
Modify
System Info
SIB3,11
1.Hard to trigger reselection

2.Easy to camp on the cell
Increase the POTENTIAL load
Normal load
Stay
System Info
SIB3,11
Heavy load
Freq2 1.Easy to trigger reselection
2.Easy to select light load

Inter-freq neighbor Cell
Modify
Decrease the POTENTIAL load
System Info
SIB3,11
Idle state
CCH state
Based on the characteristics of inter-frequency cell selection and reselection.

Sintersearch
When this value is increased by the serving cell, the UE starts inter-frequency cell
reselection ahead of schedule.
When this value is decreased by the serving cell, the UE delays inter-frequency
cell reselection.
Qoffset1(s,n): applies to R (reselection) rule with CPICH RSCP
When this value is increased by the serving cell, the UE has a lower probability of
selecting a neighboring cell.
When this value is decreased by the serving cell, the UE has a higher probability
of selecting a neighboring cell.
Qoffset2(s,n): applies to R (reselection) rule with CPICH Ec/I0
When this value is increased by the serving cell, the UE has a lower probability of
selecting a neighboring cell.
When this value is decreased by the serving cell, the UE has a higher probability
of selecting a neighboring cell.
Key parameters PUC

z
Cell LDC algorithm switch
Parameter ID: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH PUC
The default value of this parameter is Off
Load level division threshold 1 (Heavy)
Parameter ID: SPUCHEAVY
The default value of this parameter is 70(70%)
Load level division threshold 2 (Light)
Parameter ID: SPUCLIGHT

Parameter ID: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH PUC
Content: This parameter is used to enable or disable the PUC algorithm..
Set this parameter through ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD CELLALGOSWITCH
Load level division threshold 1 (Heavy)

Parameter ID: SPUCHEAVY
Content: This parameter is one of the thresholds used to assess cell load level and to
decide whether the cell load level is heavy or not.
The default value of this parameter is 70%,
Set this parameter through ADD CELLPUC / MOD CELLPUC
Load level division threshold 2 (Light)
Parameter ID: SPUCLIGHT
Content: This parameter is one of the thresholds used to assess cell load level and to
decide whether the cell load level is heavy or not.
Key parameters PUC

z
Load level division hysteresis
Parameter ID: SPUCHYST
PUC period timer length
Parameter ID: PUCPERIODTIMERLEN
The default value of this parameter is 1800(s)
Load level division hysteresis

Parameter ID: SPUCHYST
Content: This parameter specifies the hysteresis used during cell load level
assessment to avoid unnecessary ping-pong effect of a cell between two load levels
due to a little load change.
PUC period timer length
Parameter ID: PUCPERIODTIMERLEN
Value range: 6 to 86400 s
Content: This parameter specifies the period of potential user control. The higher the
parameter is set, the longer the period to trigger the PUC is.
The default value of this parameter is 1800(s)
Set this parameter through SET LDCPERIOD
Key parameters PUC

z
Sintersearch offset 1
Parameter ID: OFFSINTERLIGHT
The default value of this parameter is 2 (-4dB)
Parameter ID: OFFSINTERHEAVY
Parameter ID: OFFSINTERLIGHT
Value range: 10 to 10 ,step:2dB
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Sintersearch when the center cell load
level is "Light". It is strongly recommended that this parameter be set to a value not
higher than 0. The default value of this parameter is 2 (-4dB)
Parameter ID: OFFSINTERHEAVY
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Sintersearch when the center cell load
level is "Heavy". It is strongly recommended that this parameter be set to a value not
lower than 0. The default value of this parameter is 2 (4dB)
Key parameters PUC

z
Qoffset1 offset 1
Parameter ID: OFFQOFFSET1LIGHT
Qoffset1 offset 2
Parameter ID: OFFQOFFSET1HEAVY
Qoffset1 offset 1
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Qoffset1RSCP when the current
cell has heavy load and the neighboring cell has light or normal load. To enable the
UE to select a neighboring cell with relatively light load, it is strongly recommended
that this parameter be set to a value not higher than 0.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLPUC/MOD CELLPUC
Qoffset1 offset 2
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Qoffset1RSCP when the load of a
neighboring cell is heavier than that of the center cell. To enable the UE to select a
neighboring cell with relatively light load, it is strongly recommended that this
parameter be set to a value not lower than 0.
Key parameters PUC

z
Qoffset2 offset 1
Qoffset2 offset 2
Qoffset1 offset 1
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Qoffset1RSCP when the current cell
has heavy load and the neighboring cell has light or normal load. To enable the UE to
select a neighboring cell with relatively light load, it is strongly recommended that this
parameter be set to a value not higher than 0.
Qoffset1 offset 2
Content: This parameter defines the offset of Qoffset2EcNo when the load of a
neighboring cell is heavier than that of the center cell. To enable the UE to select a
neighboring cell with relatively light load, it is strongly recommended that this
parameter be set to a value not lower than 0.
Contents
Intra-Frequency Load Balancing

z
Intra-frequency Load Balancing (LDB) is performed to adjust

the coverage areas of cells by modifying PCPICH power
LDB affect UEs in all states
Intra-frequency Load Balancing (LDB) is performed to adjust the coverage areas of

cells according to the measured values of cell downlink power load. RNC checks the
load of cells periodically and adjusts the transmit power of the P-CPICH in the
associated cells based on the cell load.
When the load of a cell increases, the cell reduces its coverage to lighten its load.
When the load of a cell decreases, the cell extends its coverage so that some traffic is
off-loaded from its neighboring cells to it.
Reduction of the pilot power will make the UEs at the edge of the cell handed over to
neighboring cells, especially to those with a relatively light load and with relatively high
pilot power. After that, the downlink load of the cell is lightened accordingly.
LDB Procedure
Threshold
Cell TCP
Heavy?
Handover or
Light?
Cell Reselection
Normal?
RNC
Modify cell PCPICH

power
Updated PCPICH
POWER
NodeB
UE
The NodeB periodically reports the total TCP of the cell, and the LDB periodically triggers
the following activities:
Assessing the cell load level based on the total TCP
If the downlink load of a cell is higher than the value of the Cell overload threshold, it is
an indication that the cell is heavily loaded. In this case, the transmit power of the PCPICH needs to be reduced by a step, which is defined by the Pilot power adjustment
step parameter. However, if the current transmit power is equal to the value of the Min
transmit power of PCPICH parameter, no adjustment is performed.
If the downlink load of a cell is lower than the value of the Cell underload threshold, it is
an indication that the cell has sufficient remaining capacity for more load. In this case, the
transmit power of the P-CPICH increases by a step, which is defined by the Pilot power
adjustment step parameter, to help to lighten the load of neighboring cells. However, if
the current transmit power is equal to the value of the Max transmit power of PCPICH
parameter, no adjustment is performed.
Key parameters LDB

z
Parameter ID: NBMLdcAlgoSwitch LDB
The default value of this parameter is Off
Intra-frequency LDB period timer length
Parameter ID: IntraFreqLdbPeriodTimerLen
The default value of this parameter is 1800 (s)

Parameter ID: NBMLdcAlgoSwitch LDB
Content: This parameter is used to enable or disable the LDB algorithm..
Intra-frequency LDB period timer length
Parameter ID: IntraFreqLdbPeriodTimerLen
Content: This parameter specifies the length of the intra-frequency LDB period.
The default value of this parameter is 1800 (s)
Key parameters LDB

z
Cell overload threshold (Heavy)
Parameter ID: CellOverrunThd
Cell underload threshold (Light)
Parameter ID: CellUnderrunThd
Cell overload threshold

Parameter ID: CellOverrunThd
Content: If the downlink load of a cell exceeds this threshold, the algorithm can
decrease the pilot transmit power of the cell so as to extend the capacity of the whole
system.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDB / MOD CELLLDB
Cell underload threshold
Parameter ID: CellUnderrunThd
Content: If the downlink load of a cell is lower than this threshold, the algorithm can
increase the pilot transmit power of the cell so as to share the load of other cells.
Key parameters LDB

z
Pilot power adjustment step
Parameter ID: PCPICHPowerPace
The default value of this parameter is 2 (0.2dB)
Max transmit power of PCPICH
Parameter ID: MaxPCPICHPower
The default value of this parameter is 346 (34.6dBm)
Pilot power adjustment step

Parameter ID: PCPICHPowerPace
Value range: 0 to 10 , Step 0.1dB
Content: This parameter defines the step for the adjustment to the pilot power.
The default value of this parameter is 2, 0.2dB
Max transmit power of PCPICH
Parameter ID: MaxPCPICHPower
Value range: 100 to 500 ,Step 0.1dB
Content: This parameter defines the maximum transmit power of the P-CPICH in a cell.
This parameter has to be set according to the actual system environment, that is, for
example, cell coverage (radius) and geographical environment. If the maximum transmit
power of the P-CPICH is set too low, the cell coverage decreases. When a certain
proportion of soft handover area is ensured, any more increase in the pilot power
achieves no improvement on the performance of the downlink coverage.
Set this parameter through ADD PCPICH / MOD PCPICHPWR
Key parameters LDB

Min transmit power of PCPICH
Parameter ID: MinPCPICHPower
Min transmit power of PCPICH

Parameter ID: MinPCPICHPower
Content: This parameter defines the minimum transmit power of the P-CPICH in a cell.
This parameter has to be set according to the actual system environment, that is, for
example, (radius) and geographical environment. If the minimum transmit power of the
P-CPICH is set too low, the cell coverage will be affected. The parameter has to be set
under the condition that a certain proportion of soft handover area is ensured or the
occurrence of coverage hole can be prevented.
Set this parameter through ADD PCPICH / MOD PCPICHPWR
Contents
Why we need CAC?

z
WCDMA is an interference limited system, after a new call is

admitted, the system load will be increased
If a cell is high loaded, a new call will cause ongoing user

dropped
We must keep the coverage planned by the Radio Network

Planning
CAC is needed under such scenarios:

1. RRC connection setup request
2. RAB setup and Bandwidth increasing
3. Handover
4. RB reconfiguration
Flow chart of CAC
The admission decision is based on:
Cell available code resource: managed in RNC
Cell available power resource, that is DL/UL load : measured in NodeB
NodeB resource state, that is, NodeB credits : managed in RNC
Available Iub transport layer resource, that is, Iub transmission bandwidth:
managed in RNC
HSPA user number (only for HSPA service)
Algorithm Switch of CAC

Admission control Switches can be set on RNC LMT:
z
Power CAC
Uplink CAC algorithm switch
Downlink CAC algorithm switch
NodeB Credit CAC
CAC algorithm switch : CacSwitch
Cell CAC algorithm switch: CRD_ADCTRL
HSDPA user number CAC
CAC algorithm switch :HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
HSUPA user number CAC
CAC algorithm switch: HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL
Except the mandatory code and Iub resource admission control, the admission control based
on power and NodeB credit ,HSDPA User Number can be disabled through the LMT command:
Power CAC can be switched off by ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD CELLALGOSWITCH
Uplink CAC algorithm switch (NBMULCACALGOSELSWITCH ) specifies the algorithm used
for power admission in the uplink.
Downlink CAC algorithm switch (NBMDLCACALGOSELSWITCH) specifies the algorithm
used for power admission in the downlink.
NodeB Credit CAC can be switched off by SET CACALGOSWITCH or ADD
CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD CELLALGOSWITCH
CAC algorithm switch (CacSwitch) specifies the NodeB level credit CAC algorithm
Cell CAC algorithm switch (CRD_ADCTRL) specifies the Cell level credit CAC algorithm
HSDPA user number CAC switched off by ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH
HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL specifies whether to enable or disable the HSDPA admission control
algorithm.
HSUPA user number CAC switched off by ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH
HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL specifies whether to enable or disable the HSUPA admission control
algorithm
CAC Based on Code Resource

z
Code Resource CAC functions in:
RRC connection setup
Handover
R99 services RAB setup
Note: RRC connection setup and Handover have higher priority
When a new service attempts to access the network, code resource admission is
mandatory.
1. For RRC connection setup requests, the code resource admission is successful if the
current remaining code resource is enough for the RRC connection.
2. For handover services, the code resource admission is successful if the current
remaining code resource is enough for the service.
3. For other R99 services, the RNC has to ensure that the remaining code does not
exceed the configurable threshold after admission of the new service.
4. For HSDPA services, the reserved codes are shared by all HSDPA services. Therefore,
the code resource admission is not needed.
So the RRC connection setup and Handover has higher priority to access a cell
CAC Based on Power Resource

z
UL and DL Power Resource CAC functions in:
R99 cell
R99 RAB setup
Handover
HSPA cell
RRC connection
R99 RAB setup
HSPA RAB setup
Handover
Note: RRC connection setup and Handover have higher priority

The UL CAC and DL CAC are independent .

The basic principle of Power CAC is: RNC predict the cell power load after the access. If
the load will be higher than a threshold, the admission is failed.
So, by setting different threshold for different access, we can realize different priorities.
Power CAC Algorithms

z
Algorithm 1: based on UL/DL load measurement and load

prediction (RTWP and TCP)
Algorithm 2: based on Equivalent Number of User (ENU)
Algorithm 3: loose call admission control algorithm
Huawei provide 3 Power CAC Algorithms

Algorithm 1: power resource admission decision based on power or interference.
Depending on the current cell load (uplink load factor and downlink transmitted carrier power)
and the access request, the RNC determines whether the cell load will exceed the threshold
upon admitting a new call. If yes, the RNC rejects the request. If not, the RNC accepts the
request.
Algorithm 2: power resource admission decision based on the number of equivalent
users.Based on Huawei testing and experience, The 12.2 kbit/s AMR traffic is used to
calculate the Equivalent Number of Users (ENU) of all other services in UL and DL. The
12.2 kbit/s AMR traffic's ENU is assumed to be 1. Depending on the current number of
equivalent users and the access request in UL and DL, the RNC determines whether the
number of equivalent users will exceed the threshold upon admitting a new call. If yes, the
RNC rejects the request. If not, the RNC accepts the request.
Algorithm 3: power resource admission decision based on power or interference, but with
the estimated load increment always set to 0.Depending on the current cell load (uplink load
factor and downlink TCP) and the access request, the RNC determines whether the cell
load will exceed the threshold, with the estimated load increment set to 0. If yes, the RNC
rejects the request. If not, the RNC accepts the request.
Basic principle of Uplink CAC Algorithm 1

Admission request
UL = 1
Get current RTWP, and calculate the

current load factor
Get the traffic characteristic, and

estimate the increment of load factor
UL _ predicted = UL + + CCH
Calculate the predicted load factor
Smaller than
the threshold?
admitted
PN
RTWP
rejected
End of UL CAC
Pn is uplink receive background noise.

The procedure for uplink power resource decision is as follows:
1. The RNC obtains the uplink RTWP of the cell, and calculate the current uplink load
factor.
2. The RNC calculates the uplink load increment UL based on the service request.
3. The RNC uses the formula UL,predicted=UL + UL to forecast the uplink load
factor.
4. By comparing the forecasted uplink load factor UL,predicted with the corresponding
threshold ,the RNC decides whether to accept the access request or not.
Basic principle of Downlink CAC Algorithm1
The procedure for downlink power resource decision is as follows:

1. The RNC obtains the cell downlink TCP, and calculates the downlink load factor by
multiplying the maximum downlink transmit power by this TCP.
2. The RNC calculates the downlink load increment P based on the service request and
the current load.
3. The RNC forecasts the downlink load factor.
4. By comparing the downlink load factor with the corresponding threshold (DL threshold
of Conv AMR service, DL threshold of Conv non_AMR service, DL threshold of other
services, DL Handover access threshold), the RNC decides whether to accept the
access request or not.
Basic principle of CAC Algorithm 2

Admission request
ENU
Get current total ENU

Get the traffic characteristic, and
estimate the increment of ENU
Smaller than
the threshold?
admitted
ENU
i =1
ENU new
ENU total ( N + 1) = ENU total ( N ) + ENU new
Calculate the predicted ENU
total
(N ) =
ENULoad = ENU total ( N + 1) / ENU max
rejected
End of UL/DL CAC

The procedure for ENU resource decision is as follows:

1. The RNC obtains the total ENU of all exist users ENUtotal.
2. The RNC get the ENU of the new incoming user ENUnew.
3. The RNC forecast the ENU load.
4. By comparing the forecasted ENU load with the corresponding threshold (the same
threshold as power resource), the RNC decides whether to accept the access request
or not.
The ENUmax can be set by LMT, the ENUnew and ENUi is determined by Huawei
algorithm, there is an example in next slide.
Power CAC for RRC connection Setup

z
For the RRC connection request is, tolerance principles are

applied :
Emergency call, Detach , Registration
Direct Admission
RRC connection request for other reasons
UL/ DL OLC Trigger threshold Admission
To ensure that the RRC connection request is not denied by mistake, tolerance principles
are applied.
The admission decision is made for the following reasons of the RRC connection request:
1. For the RRC connection request for the reasons of emergency call, detach or
registration, direct admission is used ,that is no limitation.
2. For the RRC connection request for other reasons, UL/DL OLC Trigger
threshold is used for admission. By default, the OLC trigger threshold is
relatively high (DL/UL 95%), which make the RRC connections are easily set
up.
UL Power CAC for R99 Cell (Algorithm1)

z
For R99 DCH RAB Setup, The RNC uses the following formula
to predict the uplink load factor :
UL _ predicted = UL + UL + UL CCH
Where the
PN
RTWP
By comparing the predicted uplink load factor UL,predicted with the
UL = 1
corresponding threshold ,the RNC decides whether to accept the

access request or not
The threshold for Conv AMR service , Conv non_AMR service , Other R99 services ,
Handover are set independently, which provide different priorities.
Normally, Other R99 services < Conv non_AMR service services < Conv AMR
service < Handover
The uplink load increment UL is determined by :
1. The Eb/No of the new incoming call
2. The uplink load increment is proportional to the value of Eb/No.
3. UL neighbor interference factor
4. Active Factor of the new incoming call
DL Power CAC for R99 Cell (Algorithm1)

z
For R99 DCH RAB Setup, The RNC uses the following formula to
predict the downlink load factor :
DL _ predicted = DL + DL + DL CCH
Where the
DL =
TCP
Pmax
DL =
DL
Pmax
By comparing the predicted downlink load factor DL,predicted with

the corresponding threshold ,the RNC decides whether to accept
the access request or not
The threshold for Conv AMR service , Conv non_AMR service , Other R99 services ,
Handover are set independently, which provide different priorities.
Normally, Other R99 services < Conv non_AMR service services < Conv AMR service <
Handover
The downlink load increment DL is determined by :
1. The Eb/No of the new incoming call
2. Non-orthogonality factor
3. Current transmission carrier power
4. Active Factor of the new incoming call
UL Power CAC for HSPA Cell (Algorithm1)

z
The power increment of an HSUPA service is related to Ec/No,

GBR requirement, neighboring interference factor, active factor of
the service. The formula of UL power CAC for HSUPA is similar to
that for R99
After RSEPS measurement is introduced, the UL RTWP is divided

into two parts:
Controllable part
The UL interference generated by E-DCH scheduling services belong to

the controllable part
Uncontrollable part
RSEPS: Received scheduled E-DCH power share

z
E-DCH scheduling service consists of following two types:
TypeA: all UEs for which this cell is the serving E-DCH cell
The uplink load generated by TypeA E-DCH scheduling service is defined as follows:
UL EDCH , S =
RSEPS
RTWP
TypeB: all UEs for which this cell is
NOT the serving EDCH-cell
The uplink load generated by
TypeB E-DCH scheduling service

is defined by UL,EDCH,f,
which is fixed to zero
The Uplink uncontrollable load
Is defined as follows:
UL , non ctrl = UL UL , EDCH , s UL , EDCH , f


z
UL Power CAC for HSUPA Scheduling Services and HSUPA Non-Scheduling Services
RNC admits HSUPA scheduling service in either of the following cases
Formula 1,2 or 3 is fulfilled
Formula 4 is fulfilled
RNC admits HSUPA Non-scheduling service in either of the following cases
Formula 1,2 or 3 is fulfilled
Formula 4 and 5 are fulfilled
ThdL is the Low priority HSUPA user PBR threshold of the current cell
ThdE is the Equal priority HSUPA user PBR threshold of the current cell
ThdGE is the High priority HSUPA user PBR threshold of the current cell
HS-DPCCH is the value of the UL HS-DPCCH reserve factor parameter, which defines the factor of
UL HS-DPCCH resource reserved
thd is the cell UL admission threshold for specific type of service, that is UL threshold of Conv
AMR service, UL threshold of Conv non_AMR service, UL threshold of other services or UL
handover access service threshold

z
UL Power CAC for R99 service in HSPA cell
Uncontollable interference must be kept within a given

range. The purpose is to ensure the stability of system and
to prevent non-scheduling services and DCH services
from seizing the resources of HSUPA services
UL , non ctrl + UL + UL , cch + HS DPCCH < thd

UL + UL + UL., cch + HS DPCCH < thd total
RNC admits R99 services if formula 1 and 2 are fulfilled
thd-total is the UL total power threshold of the current cell

thd is the cell UL admission threshold for specific type of service, that is UL threshold of Conv
AMR service, UL threshold of Conv non_AMR service, UL threshold of other services or UL
handover access service threshold
DL Power CAC for HSPA Cell (Algorithm1)

z
DL Power incremental estimation for DCH RAB in HSPA

cell is similar to the DCH RAB in R99 cell
DL Power incremental estimation for HSDPA RAB PDL is

made based on GBR, Ec/No, Non-orthogonality factor

z
DL power CAC for R99 service in HSPA cell
RNC admits R99 service (i.e. DCH RAB) in either of the

following situations:
Pnon-hspa is the current non-HSDPA power

Pcch-res is the power reserved for the common channel
Pmax is the cell maximum transmit power
Thdnon-hspa-cac is the cell DL admission threshold for different types of service, that is DL
threshold for Conv AMR service, DL threshold for Conv non-AMR service, DL threshold for
other service or DL handover access threshold
Ptotal is the current downlink transmitted carrier power
Thdtotal-cac is the threshold of cell DL total power. It is defined by the DL total power threshold
parameter
GBP is power requirement for GBR
Phsupa-res is the power reserved for HSUPA downlink control channels (E-AGCH/E-RGCH/E-HICH)
Pmax-hspa is the maximum available power for HSPA. Its value is associated with the HSDPA
power allocation mode.

z
DL power CAC for HSDPA RAB in HSPA cell
RNC admits the HSDPA streaming service in any of the following situations:
Formulas 3 and 4 are fulfilled
RNC admits the HSDPA BE service in any of the following situations:
PBRstrm is the provided bit rate of all existing streaming services

Thdhsdap-str is the admission threshold for streaming PBR decision. It is defined by the Hsdpa
streaming PBR threshold parameter
PBRbe is the provided bit rate of all existing BE services
Thdhsdap-be is the admission threshold for BE PBR decision. It is defined by the Hsdpa best effort
PBR threshold parameter
GBR is the power requirement for GBR
Phsupa-res is the power reserved for HSUPA downlink control channels (E-AGCH/E-RGCH/E-HICH)
Pmax-hspa is the maximum available power for HSPA. Its value is associated with the HSDPA
power allocation mode.
Ptotal is the current downlink transmitted carrier power
Pmax is the cell maximum transmitted power
Thdtotal-cac is the threshold of cell DL total power, which is defined by the DL total power
threshold parameter
Pcch-res is the power reserved for the common channels
Pnon-hspa is the current non-HSDPA power

z
DL power CAC for HSUPA control channels in HSPA cell
The power of downlink control channels (E-AGCH/E-RGCH/EHICH) are reserved by DL HSUPA reserved factor. Therefore,
the power admission for these channels is NOT needed
Power CAC for Algorithm2

z
For R99 and HSDPA RAB, The RNC uses the following formula
to predict the uplink load factor :
(ENUtotal + ENUnew) / ENUmax
By comparing the forecasted ENU load with the corresponding

threshold ,the RNC decides whether to accept the access request
or not
ENUtotal is the total ENU of all existing users.

ENUnew is ENU of the new incoming user .
ENUmax is the configured maximum ENU (UL total equivalent user number or DL total
nonhsdpa equivalent user number) .
The threshold for Algorithm2 are the same with Algorithm1,for Conv AMR service ,
Conv non_AMR service , Other R99 services , Handover , HSDPA are set independently:
Service Type
Admission Threshold
UL DCH/HSUPA
UL threshold of Conv AMR service

UL threshold of Conv non_AMR service
UL threshold of other services
UL Handover access threshold
DL DCH
DL threshold of Conv AMR service

DL threshold of Conv non_AMR service
DL threshold of other services
DL Handover access threshold
HSDPA
DL total power threshold
Typically ENU (equivalent number of users) for different services (with activity factor to be
100%)
Service Type
Admission Threshold
UL DCH/HSUPA

DL DCH

HSDPA
Key parameters
z
Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForAMR
The default value of this parameter is 75%
Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR

Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForAMR
Value range: 0 to 100 %
Content: The uplink threshold for the AMR conversational service is used for the uplink
admission of AMR conversational service users. The threshold is shared by algorithm 1,
algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC / MOD CELLCAC
Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR
Content: The downlink threshold for the AMR conversational service is used for the
downlink admission of AMR conversational service users. The threshold is shared by
algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Key parameters
z
Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForOther
Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForHo

Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForOther
Content: This parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the
conversational service. It is used for uplink admission of other services. The threshold is
shared by algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Parameter ID: UlNonCtrlThdForHo
Content: The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users.
The parameter is useful only to uplink inter-frequency handovers. Do not make the
admission decision in the uplink soft handover. The threshold is shared by algorithm 1,
algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Key parameters
z
Parameter ID: DLCONVAMRTHD
Parameter ID: DLCONVNAMRTHD

Parameter ID: DLCONVAMRTHD
Content: The downlink threshold for the AMR conversational service is used for the
downlink admission of AMR conversational service users. The threshold is shared by
algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Parameter ID: DLCONVNAMRTHD
Content: The downlink threshold for the non-AMR conversational service is used for the
downlink admission of non-AMR conversational service users. The threshold is shared
by algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Key parameters
z
Parameter ID: DLOTHERTHD
Parameter ID: DLHOTHD

Parameter ID: DLOTHERTHD
Content: This parameter is the downlink threshold for services other than the
conversational service. It is used for downlink admission of users of other services. The
threshold is shared by algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC/MOD CELLCAC
Parameter ID: DLHOTHD
Content: The downlink handover threshold is used for downlink admission of handover
users. The threshold is shared by algorithm 1, algorithm 2 and algorithm 3.
Key parameters
z
Parameter ID: DLCELLTOTALTHD
Hsdpa streaming PBR threshold
Parameter ID: HSDPASTRMPBRTHD
Hsdpa best effort PBR threshold
Parameter ID: HSDPABEPBRTHD

Parameter ID: DLCELLTOTALTHD
Content: This parameter specifies the total downlink power threshold of the cell.
Parameter ID: HSDPASTRMPBRTHD
Content: This parameter specifies the average throughput admission threshold of the
HSDPA streaming traffic.
Parameter ID: : HSDPABEPBRTHD
Content: This parameter specifies the average throughput admission threshold of the
HSDPA best effort traffic.
Key parameters
z
UL total equivalent user number
Parameter ID: ULTOTALEQUSERNUM
DL total equivalent user number
Parameter ID: DLTOTALEQUSERNUM
UL total equivalent user number

Parameter ID: ULTOTALEQUSERNUM
Content: When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent number
of users corresponding to the 100% uplink load.
DL total equivalent user number
Parameter ID: DLTOTALEQUSERNUM
Content: When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent number
of users corresponding to the 100% downlink load.
CAC Based on NodeB Credit Resource

z
When a new service accesses the network, NodeB credit

resource admission is optional
The principles of NodeB credit admission control are similar

to those of power resource admission control, that is, to
check in the local cell whether the remaining credit can
support the requesting services
CE stands for NodeB credit on RNC side and for Channel Element on NodeB side. It is
used to measure the channel demodulation capability of the NodeBs
The resource of one 12.2kbps voice service, including 3.4kbps signaling on the DCCH,
consumed in baseband is defined as one CE. If there is 3.4kbps signaling on the DCCH,
but no voice channel, one CE is consumed.The credit resource are divided into several
resource pools. Each resource pool is shared by a local cell.
According to the common and dedicated channels capacity consumption laws, as well as
the addition, removal, and reconfiguration of the common and dedicated channels, the
Controlling RNC (CRNC) debits the amount of the credit resource consumed from or
credits the amount to the Capacity Credit of the local cell group (and local cell , if any)
based on the spreading factor.
the UL Capacity Credit and DL Capacity Credit are separate, so the CAC is performed in
the UL and DL, respectively.

z
For DCH service, MBR is used to calculate the NodeB

Credit based on spreading factor :
The total NodeB Credit Resource of a local cell is depend on

the configuration.
Direction
Spreading
Factor
Corresponding Credits Consumed
DL
256
UL
256
DL
128
UL
64
DL
128
UL
64
DL
32
UL
16
DL
64
UL
32
DL
32
UL
16
DL
16
UL
10
DL
UL
20
Typical Traffic Class
3.4 kbit/s SRB
13.6 kbit/s SRB
12.2 kbit/s AMR
64 kbit/s VP
32 kbps PS
64 kbit/s PS
128 kbit/s PS
384 kbit/s PS

z
For HSUPA service, the rate used to calculate the

spreading factor is MBR

z
When a new service tries to access the network, the credit

resource admission CAC functions in :
Handover service
The other services
For an RRC connection setup request, the credit resource admission is successful if the current
remaining credit resource is sufficient for the RRC connection.
For a handover service, the credit resource admission is successful if the current remaining credit
resource is sufficient for the service.
For other services, the RNC has to ensure that the remaining credit does not exceed the
configurable thresholds after admission of the new services.
There is no capacity consumption law for HS-DSCH in 3GPP TS 25.433, so certain credits are
reserved for HSDPA RAB, and credit admission for HSDPA is not needed.
UL Capacity Credit and DL Capacity Credit are separate, the credit resource admission is
implemented in the UL and DL, respectively.
Key parameters
z
Ul HandOver Credit Reserved SF
Parameter ID: UlHoCeResvSf
The default value of this parameter is SF16
Dl HandOver Credit and Code Reserved SF
Parameter ID: DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Ul HandOver Credit Reserved SF

Parameter ID: UlHoCeResvSf
Value range: SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF
Content: The spreading factor specified by this parameter is used to define the uplink
credit resource reserved for handover services.
SFOFF means that none of resources are reserved for handover services. If the
remaining uplink resource cannot fulfill the requirement for the reserved resource after
the admission of a new service, the service is rejected.
Dl HandOver Credit and Code Reserved SF
Parameter ID: DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Value range: SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF
Content: The spreading factor specified by this parameter is used to define the downlink
credit and channelized code resources reserved for handover services.
SFOFF means that none of the resources is reserved for handover. If the remaining
downlink resource cannot fulfill the requirement for the reserved resource after the
access of a new service, the service is rejected.
CAC Based on Iub Interface Resource

z
The CAC of the Iub transmission resources is similar
Admission Control is used to determine whether the Iub

resources are enough to accept a new access request
It functions in:
RRC connection setup and Services RAB setup
Handover
A user accessing the network from a path should go through the admission of the path,
resource group, and physical port in turn. The user that passes all the admission can be
successfully admitted by the transport layer.
Path means AAL2 PATH, IP PATH
The physical ports correspond to IMA, UNI, FRAATM, NCOPT, ETHER, PPP, and MLPPP.
The priority of the 2 types of access follows : Handover >RRC connection setup and
Services RAB setup

z
Iub Overbooking
The Iub overbooking feature considers the statistic multiplexing

of service activities and multiple users
Admit more users, increases the resource utilization on the Iub

interface.
The Iub overbooking feature considers the statistic multiplexing of service activities and
multiple users. Through the admission of more users, Iub overbooking increases the
resource utilization on the Iub interface.
If the RNC allocates the maximum bandwidth to the subscriber when a service is
established, a large proportion of the Iub transmission bandwidth is unused. For example,
downloading a 50 KB page takes only about one second, but reading this page needs
dozens of seconds. Thus, over 90% of the Iub transmission bandwidth is not used.
To save the Iub transmission bandwidth for operator use, Huawei provides the Iub
overbooking function, which applies an admission control mechanism to access the
service.

z
Iub Overbooking
CS voice services
Service rate:12.2 kbit/s
SID
PS interactive and background services
Download time
Reading time
The UMTS supports four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and
background.
The transmission rate varies with the traffic class as follows:
For Circuit Switched (CS) conversational services, the channel transmits voice signals at
a certain rate (for example, 12.2 kbit/s) during a conversation and only transmits Silence
Descriptors (SIDs) at intervals when there is no conversation.
For Packet Switched (PS) interactive and background services, such as web browsing,
there is data transmitted during data downloading. After a web page has been
downloaded, and when the user is reading the page, however, there is very little data to
transfer.

z
Iub Overbooking
CS voice services
PS interactive and background services
Activity Factor
GBR
MML
SET DEFAULTFACTORTABLE
SET USERGBR
SET CORRMALGOSWITCH (IUB_OVERBOOKING_SWITCH)
ADD AAL2PATH
ADD IPPATH
Use SET DEFAULTFACTORTABLE to set a default of Activity Factor table for all the
services.
Use SET USERGBR to set GBR for BE services
Use SET CORRMALGOSWITCH (IUB_OVERBOOKING_SWITCH) to define the switch
of Iub overbooking
CAC Based on Number of HSPA Users

z
HSPA user number can be limited in:
Cell level
maximum number of HSPA users in a cell
NodeB level
Maximum number of HSPA users in all the cells configured in

one NodeB
When the HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL is on, the HSDPA services have to undergo HSDPA
user number admission decision.
When a new HSDPA service attempts to access the network, it is admitted if the number
of HSDPA users in the cell and that in the NodeB do not exceed the associated
thresholds
When the HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL is on, the HSUPA services have to undergo HSUPA
user number admission decision.
When a new HSUPA service attempts to access the network, it is admitted if the number
of HSUPA users in the cell and that in the NodeB do not exceed the associated
thresholds
Key parameters
z
HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
Maximum HSDPA user number
Parameter ID: MaxHSDSCHUserNum
HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
Parameter ID: HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
Parameter ID: HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL
Maximum HSUPA user number
Parameter ID: MaxHsupaUserNum
Maximum HSDPA user number

Parameter ID: MaxHSDSCHUserNum
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of HSDPA users in a cell.
HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
Value range: 0 ,1
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the HSDPA admission control algorithm.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / LST CELLALGOSWITCH/MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH
HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL
Value range: 0 ,1
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the HSDPA admission control algorithm.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLALGOSWITCH / LST CELLALGOSWITCH/MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH
Maximum HSUPA user number
Parameter ID: MaxHsupaUserNum
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of HSDPA users in a cell.
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of HSUPA users in a cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC / LST CELLCAC / MOD CELLCAC
Contents
Why we need IAC?

z
The disadvantage of CAC
For PS NRT (Non-Real Time) services, CAC is not flexible
No consideration about the priority of different users
No consideration about Directed Retry after CAC rejection
Intelligent means the algorithm can increase admission

successful rate
CAC limits the setup of RRC and RAB . When the cell is overloaded , the CAC will cause
access failure.
In order to improve the access success rate the Intelligent Access Control (IAC) algorithm is
used to improve the access success rate. The IAC procedure includes rate negotiation,
Call Admission Control (CAC), preemption, queuing, and Directed Retry Decision (DRD).
IAC Overview
z
The access procedure (include the IAC)
As shown in the Figure, the procedure for the UE access includes the procedures for RRC
connection setup and RAB setup. The success in the RRC connection setup is one of the
prerequisites for the RAB setup.
During the RRC connection processing, if resource admission fails, DRD and redirection apply.
During the RAB processing, the RNC performs the following steps:
Performs RAB DRD to select a suitable cell to access, for service steering or load balancing.
Performs rate negotiation according to the service requested by the UE.
Performs cell resource admission decision. If the admission is passed, UE access is granted.
Otherwise, the RNC performs the next step.
Selects a suitable cell, according to the RAB DRD algorithm, from the cells where no admission
attempt has been made, and then goes to rate negotiation and cell resource admission again. If
all DRD admission attempts to the cells fail, go to the next step.
Makes a preemption attempt. If the preemption is successful, UE access is granted. If the
preemption fails or is not supported, the RNC performs the next step, queuing.
Makes a queuing attempt. If the queuing is successful, UE access is granted. If the queuing fails
or is not supported, the RNC Rejects UE access.
IAC - RRC Connection Processing
When a new service accesses the network, an RRC connection must be set up first. If the
RRC connection request is denied, DRD is performed. If DRD also fails, RRC
redirection is performed to direct the UE to an inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell
through cell reselection.
After the RNC receives the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message, the CAC algorithm
decides whether an RRC connection can be set up between the UE and the current
cell.
If the RRC connection can be set up between the UE and the current cell, the RNC sends
an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE. If the RRC connection cannot
be set up between the UE and the current cell, the RNC takes the following
actions:
RRC DRD :
If the DRD_SWITCH is set to 0, the RRC DRD fails, and RRC redirection is performed.
Else, the RNC performs the following steps:
1. The RNC selects inter-frequency neighboring cells of the current cell. These
neighboring cells are suitable for blind handovers.
2. The RNC generates a list of candidate DRD-supportive inter-frequency cells. The
quality of the candidate cell meets the requirements of inter-frequency DRD:
(CPICH_Ec/No)RACH > DRD_Ec/No nbcell
where
(CPICH_Ec/No)RACH is the cached CPICH Ec/N0 value included in the RACH
measurement report.
DRD_Ec/No nbcell is the DRD Ec/N0 Threshold set for the inter-frequency
neighboring cell.
3. RNC selects a target cell from the candidate cells for UE access. If the candidate cell list contains
more than one cell, the UE tries a cell randomly.
1. If the admission is successful, the RNC initiates an RRC DRD procedure.
2. If the admission to a cell fails, the UE tries admission to another cell in the candidate cell
list. If all the admission attempts fail, the RNC makes an RRC redirection decision.
4. If the candidate cell list does not contain any cell, the RRC DRD fails. The RNC performs the next
step, that is, RRC redirection.
5. RRC redirection, the RNC performs the following steps:
1. The RNC selects all inter-frequency cells of the local cell.
2. The RNC selects candidate cells. That is, exclude the cells to which inter-frequency RRC
DRD attempts have been made from the cells selected in the previous step.
3. If more than one candidate cell is available, the RNC selects a cell randomly and redirects
the UE to the cell.
Key parameters
z
RRC redirect switch
Parameter ID: RrcRedictSwitch
The default value of this parameter is

Only_To_Inter_Frequency
DRD Ec/N0 threshold
Parameter ID: DRDEcN0Threshhold
The default value of this parameter is -18-9 dB
RRC redirect switch

Parameter ID: RrcRedictSwitch
Value range: OFF, Only_To_Inter_Frequency, Allowed_To_Inter_RAT
Content: This parameter specifies the RRC redirection strategy.
The default value of this parameter is Only_To_Inter_Frequency
Set this parameter through SET DRD
DRD Ec/N0 threshold
Parameter ID: DRDEcN0Threshhold
Content: If the measured Ec/N0 value of the neighbor cell is less than this
parameter, this neighboring cell cannot be selected to be the candidate DRD
cell.
The default value of this parameter is -18-9 dB
Set this parameter through ADD INTERFREQNCELL
IAC PS Rate Negotiation

z
PS Service Rate Negotiation Includes:
Maximum expected rate negotiation
Initial rate negotiation
Target rate negotiation
Rate negotiation includes the maximum expected rate negotiation, initial rate negotiation, and target rate negotiation.
When setting up, modifying, or admitting a PS service (conversational, streaming, interactive, or background service)
the RNC and the CN negotiate the rate according to the UE capability to obtain the maximum expected rate while
ensuring a proper QoS.
For a non-real-time service in the PS domain, the RNC selects an initial rate to allocate bandwidth for the service
when Setup or UE state transits from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH based on cell code and credit resource
The Initial rate selection is affected by 2 algorithm switches: RAB Downsizing Switch, DCCC Switch
For DCH
For HSUPA
For a non-real-time service in the PS domain, if cell resource admission fails, the RNC chooses a target rate to
allocate bandwidth for the service based on cell resource in Service setup or Soft handover
Key parameters
z
RAB_Downsizing_Switch
Parameter ID: RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH
The default value of this parameter is 1 (on)
UL/DL BE traffic Initial bit rate
Parameter ID:
ULBETRAFFINITBITRATE / DLBETRAFFINITBITRATE
The default value of this parameter is D64 64k
RAB_Downsizing_Switch
Parameter ID: RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH
Value range: (0,1)
Content: This parameter specifies whether to support the RAB downsizing function.
The default value of this parameter is 1 (on)
When this parameter is set to 1, the RAB downsizing function is applied to
determine the initial bit rate based on cell resources (code and credit). .
UL/DL BE traffic Initial bit rate
Parameter ID: ULBETRAFFINITBITRATE / DLBETRAFFINITBITRATE
Value range: D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536,
D1800, D2048 k
Content: This parameter defines the uplink initial access rate of background and
interactive services in the PS domain.
The default value of this parameter is D64 64k
Set this parameter through SET FRC
IAC RAB Directed Retry Decision

z
RAB Directed Retry Decision (DRD) is used to select a

suitable cell for the UE to try an access
Inter-frequency DRD
Service Steering
Load Balancing
Inter-RAT DRD
Through the RAB DRD procedure, the RNC selects a suitable cell for RAB processing
during access control. RAB DRD is of two types: inter-frequency DRD and inter-RAT
DRD. For inter-frequency DRD, the service steering and load balancing algorithms are
available.
After receiving a RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST, the RNC initiates an RAB
DRD procedure to select a suitable cell for RAB processing during access control.
The RNC performs inter-frequency DRD firstly. If all admission attempts of interfrequency DRD fail, the RNC performs an inter-RAT DRD. If all admission attempts of
inter-RAT DRD fail, the RNC selects a suitable cell to perform preemption and
queuing .
Relation Between Service Steering DRD and Load Balancing DRD
When both service steering DRD and load balancing DRD are enabled, the general
principles of inter-frequency DRD are as follows:
Service steering DRD takes precedence over load balancing DRD. That is,
preferably take service priorities into consideration.
To services of the same service priority, load balancing applies.
IAC RAB Directed Retry Decision

RAB Directed Retry Switchs
Scenario
Switch
Description
DRD switch
DRD_SWITCH
This is the primary DRD algorithm switch. The

secondary DRD switches are valid only when
this switch is on.
Combined
services
COMB_SERV_DRD_SWITCH
DRD is applicable to combined services only

when this switch is on.
HSDPA service
HSDPA_DRD_SWITCH
DRD is applicable to HSDPA services only

HSUPA service
HSUPA_DRD_SWITCH
DRD is applicable to HSUPA services only

RAB modification
RAB_MODIFY_DRD_SWITCH
DRD is applicable to RAB modification only

DCCC
RAB_DCCC_DRD_SWITCH
DRD is applicable to traffic-volume-based

DCCC procedure or UE state transition, only
RAB setup
RAB_SETUP_DRD_SWITCH
DRD is applicable to RAB setup only when this

switch is on.
DRD algorithm switch

Parameter ID: DRDSWITCH
The default value of this parameter is off
IAC Inter-frequency DRD

z
Inter-Frequency DRD for Service Steering
DRD for Service Steering is based on Service priorities of

cells ,include:
R99 RT services priority
R99 NRT services priority
HSPA services priority
Other services priority
Called Service priority group
If the UE requests a service in an area covered by multiple frequencies, the RNC selects
the cell with the highest service priority for UE access, based on the service type of
RAB and the definitions of service priorities in the cells.
Cell service priorities help achieve traffic absorption in a hierarchical way.
The priorities of specific service types in cells are configurable. If a cell does not support a
service type, the priority of this service type is set to 0 in this cell.
The service priorities in each cell is called Service priority group , which is identified by
the Service priority group Identity parameter.
Service priority groups are configured on the LMT. In each group, priorities of R99 RT
services, R99 NRT services, HSPA services, and other services are defined.
When selecting a target cell for RAB processing, the RNC check the service type firstly ,
then, selects a cell with a high priority for the service, that is, a cell that has a small
value of service priority.

z
Inter-Frequency DRD for Service Steering

Service
priority group
Identity
Service priority
Service priority
Service priority
service
service
service
An example
priority group
of R99 RT of service
of R99 NRT
of HSPA
Service
priority of
other service
Cell A and cell B are of different frequencies.

Assume that the service priority groups given in the table are defined on an RNC, 2
groups of service priorities are defined.
Then ,Cell A is configured with service priority group 1. Cell B is configured with service
priority group 2
If UE requests a R99 RT service in cell A ,Cell B has a higher service priority of the R99
RT service than cell A. If the UE requests an RT service in cell A, preferably, the RNC
selects cell B for the UE to access.

z
Inter-Frequency DRD procedure for Service Steering
The procedure for the service steering DRD is as follows:

1The RNC determines candidate cells to which blind handovers can be performed and sorts the
candidate cells into a descending order according to service priority.
A candidate cell must meet the following conditions:
The frequency of the candidate cell is within the band supported by the UE.
The quality of the candidate cell meets the Ec/No requirements of inter-frequency DRD (DRD
Ec/N0 Threshold )
The candidate cell supports the requested service.
2The RNC selects a target cell from the candidate cells in order of service priority for UE access.
3The CAC algorithm makes an admission decision based on the status of the target cell.
If the admission attempt is successful, the RNC accepts the service request.
If the admission attempt fails, the RNC removes the cell from the candidate cells and then
choose next candidate cell.
4If admission decisions have been made in all the candidate cells
For HSPA access, the HSPA request falls back to a DCH one. Then, the algorithm goes back
to Step 1 to make an admission decision based on R99 service priorities.
For DCH access, the RNC initiates an inter-RAT DRD.
Key parameters
z
Service differential drd switch
Parameter ID: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch
Service priority group Identity
Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForR99RT
Service differential drd switch

Parameter ID: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch
Value range: ON, OFF
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable the service steering DRD algorithm
The default value of this parameter is OFF.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLDRD
Service priority of R99 RT service
Parameter ID: SpgId
Value range: 1 to 8
Content: This parameter uniquely identifies a group of service priorities that map to cells
and indicate the support of each cell for the following service types: R99 RT service,
R99 NRT service, HSPA service, and other services.
Set this parameter through ADD SPG
Key parameters
z
Service priority of R99 NRT service
PriorityServiceForR99NRT
Service priority of HSPA service
Parameter ID: SpgId
PriorityServiceForHSPA
Service priority of Other service
PriorityServiceForExtRab

Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForR99RT
Value range: 0 to 7
Content: This parameter specifies the support of the cells with a specific Service priority
group Identity for R99 RT services.
The value 0 means that these cells do not support R99 RT services.
For the values 1 through 7, the service priority is inversely proportional to the value, that is,
the value 7 indicates the lowest service priority, whereas the value 1 indicates the highest.
Service priority of R99 NRT service

Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForR99NRT
Value range: 0 to 7
group Identity for R99 NRT services.
The value 0 means that these cells do not support R99 NRT services.
Service priority of HSPA service
Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForHSPA
Value range: 0 to 7
group Identity for HSPA services.
The value 0 means that these cells do not support HSPA services.
Service priority of Other service
Parameter ID: PriorityServiceForExtRab
Value range: 0 to 7
group Identity for Other services .
The value 0 means that these cells do not support Other service .

z
Inter-Frequency DRD for Load Balance
The resources triggering DRD for Load Balance include:
DL Power
OVSF code
Any of these 2 resources can trigger inter-frequency DRD for

Load Balance
Load balancing considers two resources: power, and code.

If both are activated, power-based load balancing DRD takes precedence over codebased load balancing DRD.
Code-based load balancing DRD is applicable to only R99 services because HSDPA
services use reserved codes.

z
Inter-Frequency DRD procedure for DL Power Load Balance
The procedure for the service steering DRD is as follows:

1The RNC determines candidate cells to which blind handovers can be performed and sorts
the candidate cells into a descending order according to service priority.
A candidate cell must meet the following conditions:
The frequency of the candidate cell is within the band supported by the UE.
The quality of the candidate cell meets the Ec/No requirements of inter-frequency
DRD (DRD Ec/N0 Threshold )
The candidate cell supports the requested service.
2The RNC determines whether the DL radio load of the current cell is lower than the power
threshold for load balancing DRD (condition 1 )
power threshold for load balancing DRD is CAC parameter.
If the DL load of the current cell is lower than the threshold, the service tries admission to
the current cell.
If the DL load of the current cell is equal to or higher than the threshold, the RNC checks
the candidate cells to try to find out a target cell for UE access.
RNC will check if there is a candidate cell will meet the following condition (condition 2 ) :
Ptotal_thd,nbcell is DL total power threshold for the inter-frequency neighboring cell.

Pload,nbcell is total power load of the inter-frequency neighboring cell. For a R99 cell, it is
the Downlink Transmitted Carrier Power of the cell, and for an HSPA cell, it is the nonHSDPA power and GBP.
Ptotal_thd,cutcell is DL total power threshold for the current cell.
Pload,cutcell is the total downlink load of the current cell.
Ploadoffset is the Power balancing drd offset of the current cell.
Then, the RNC selects the target cell as follows:

If there is only one inter-frequency neighboring cell that meets the load balancing DRD
conditions, the RNC selects this cell as the target cell.
If there are multiple such cells, the RNC selects the cell with the lightest load as the
target cell.
If there is no such cell, the RNC selects the current cell as the target cell.
3The CAC algorithm makes an admission decision based on the status of the target cell.
If the admission attempt is successful, the RNC accepts the service request.
If the admission attempt fails, the RNC removes the cell from the candidate cells and
then choose next candidate cell.
4If admission decisions have been made in all the candidate cells
For HSPA access, the HSPA request falls back to a DCH one. Then, the algorithm goes
back to Step 1 to make an admission decision based on R99 service priorities.
For DCH access, the RNC initiates an inter-RAT DRD.
Key parameters
z
Power balance DRD switch on DCH
Parameter ID: LdbDrdSwitchDCH
Power balance DRD switch on HSDPA
Parameter ID: LdbDrdSwitchHSDPA
Max transmit power of cell
Parameter ID: MaxTxPower
The default value of this parameter is 430 (43dBm)
Dl power balancing drd power threshold for DCH
Parameter ID: LdbDRDOffsetDCH
Dl power balancing drd power threshold for HSDPA
Parameter ID: LdbDRDOffsetHSDPA
Power balancing drd switch

Parameter ID: PowerBalancingDrdSwitch
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable the power-based load
balancing DRD algorithm .
Set this parameter through SET DRD / ADD CELLDRD
Max transmit power of cell
Parameter ID: MaxTxPower
Value range: 0 to 500 , step:0.1dBm
Content: This parameter specifies the sum of the maximum transmit power of
all the downlink channels in a cell.
The default value of this parameter is 430 (43dBm).
Set this parameter through MOD CELL
Power balancing drd offset
Parameter ID: LoadBalanceDRDOffset
Value range: 0% to 100%
Content: This parameter specifies the load offset threshold of the current cell
and the inter-frequency cell when power balancing drd algorithm is applied.
Only when the cell load offset reaches this threshold, the inter-frequency cell
can be selected to be the target drd cell.

z
Inter-Frequency DRD procedure for Code Load Balance
The procedure of load balancing DRD based on code resource is similar to that based on power
resource.
1The RNC determines whether the minimum remaining spreading factor of the current cell is
smaller than Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd.
If the minimum SF is smaller than Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd, the
RNC tries the admission of the service request to the current cell.
If the minimum SF is not smaller than Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd,
the RNC performs the next step .
2The RNC determines whether the code load of the current cell is lower than Code occupied
rate threshold for code balancing drd. .
If the code load is lower than Code occupied rate threshold for code balancing drd,
the service tries the admission to the current cell.
If the code load is not lower than Code occupied rate threshold for code balancing
drd, the RNC selects the cell with the lightest code load or the current cell as the target
cell.
3The RNC selects the cell as follows:
If the difference between the code resource occupancies of the cell and the current cell
is larger than the value of Delta code occupied rate , the RNC selects the cell with the
lightest code load as the target cell. Otherwise, the RNC selects the current cell as the
target cell.
Key parameters
z
Code balancing drd switch
Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdSwitch
Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd
Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdMinSFThd
Code balancing drd switch

Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdSwitch
Content: This parameter specifies whether to enable the code-based load
balancing DRD algorithm.
Minimum SF threshold for code balancing drd
Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdMinSFThd
Value range: SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256
Content: If the downlink minimum SF of the best cell is below this threshold,
the code-based load balancing DRD is not triggered.
The default value of this parameter is SF8 .
Key parameters
z
Code occupied rate threshold for code balancing drd
Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdCodeRateThd
Delta code occupied rate
Parameter ID: DeltaCodeOccupiedRate
Code occupied rate threshold for code balancing drd

Parameter ID: CodeBalancingDrdCodeRateThd
Content: This parameter specifies the code occupancy threshold of the current cell for
code-based load balancing DRD.Only when the code occupancy of the best cell
reaches this threshold can code-based load balancing DRD be triggered.
The default value of this parameter is 13%.
Delta code occupied rate
Parameter ID: DeltaCodeOccupiedRate
Content: This parameter specifies the code occupied rate offset threshold of the
current cell and the inter-frequency cell when code balancing drd algorithm is applied.
Only when the code occupied rate offset reaches this threshold, the inter-frequency
cell can be selected to be the target drd cell.
The default value of this parameter is 7% .
Set this parameter through SET DRD
IAC Inter-RAT DRD

z
Inter-RAT DRD
Inter-RAT DRD is available for AMR service only in RAN 10:
The inter-RAT DRD procedure is as follows:

1,If the current cell is configured with any neighboring GSM cell suitable for blind handover
and the Service Handover Indicator is set to HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM,
the RNC performs next step. Otherwise, the service request undergoes preemption and
queuing.
2,The RNC generates a list of candidate DRD-supportive inter-RAT cells that fulfill the Ec/No
threshold.
3,The service request then tries admission to a target GSM cell in order of blind handover
priority.
4,If all admission attempts fail or the number of inter-RAT directed retries exceeds the value
of Max inter-RAT direct retry number, the service request undergoes preemption and
queuing.
Key parameters
z
Max inter-RAT direct retry number
Parameter ID: DRMaxGSMNum
Max inter-RAT direct retry number

Parameter ID: DRMaxGSMNum
Value range: 0 to 5
Content: This parameter defines the maximum number of inter-RAT directed
retries for an RAB. The value 0 means that inter-RAT DRD is not allowed.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLDRD
IAC Preemption and Queuing

z
After cell admission fails, the RNC performs preemption

and Queuing
Precondition of Preemption and Queuing

According to CN setting, Preemption and Queuing is supported
Target cell of Preemption and Queuing

Based on DRD
Preemption and Queuing guarantees the success in the access of a higher-priority user
by forcibly releasing the resources of a lower-priority user.
After cell resource admission fails, the RNC performs Preemption and Queuing if the
following conditions are met:
The RNC receives an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message indicating that
Preemption and Queuing is supported.
By default, Preemption and Queuing setting in CN may be:
USER
LEVEL
Preemption
capability
Preemptable
Queuing
High
Able
Not allowed
allowed
Medium
Able
allowed
allowed
Low
Not able
allowed
Not
allowed
Preemption and Queuing is applicable to the following cases:

Setup or modification of a service
Hard handover or SRNS relocation
UE state transits from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH
The RNC selects a suitable cell according to the settings of the DRD algorithms.
IAC Preemption
z
Preemption on different resources

Service
Resource
Service That can Be Preempted

R99 Service
R99 service
HSDPA
service
HSDPA Service
R99 + HSPA Combined Service
Code
Power
CE
Iub bandwidth
Code
Power
CE
Iub bandwidth
Number of
users
The preemption procedure is as follows:

1The preemption algorithm determines which radio link sets can be preempted. The
algorithm proceeds as follows:
Chooses SRNC users first. If no user under the SRNC is available, the
algorithm chooses users under the DRNC.
Sorts the pre-emptable users by user integrate priority, or sorts the preemptable RABs by RAB integrate priority.
Determines candidate users or RABs.
Only the users or RABs with priorities lower than the RAB to be
established are selected.
Selects as many users or RABs as necessary in order to match the resource
needed by the RAB to be established. When the priorities of two users or
RABs are the same, the algorithm chooses the user or RAB that can release
the most resources.
2The RNC releases the resources occupied by the candidate users or RABs.
3The requested service directly uses the released resources to access the network
without admission decision.
Key parameters
z
Preempt algorithm switch
Parameter ID: PREEMPTALGOSWITCH
Preempt algorithm switch

Parameter ID: PREEMPTALGOSWITCH
Content: This parameter specifies whether to support the preemption function.
Set this parameter through SET QUEUEPREEMPT
IAC Queuing
z
After Preemption rejection, UE can wait in queue, then

admission attempts for the service are made periodically till
Tmax expires.
Admission attempts are made based on Queuing priority:

Pqueue = Tmax Telapsed
Tmax is the maximum time in the queue, default value is 5s
Telapsed is the time has queued
After the cell resource decision fails, the RNC performs queuing if the RNC receives an RAB
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message indicating the queuing function is supported
The queuing algorithm checks whether the queue is full, that is, whether the number of service
requests in the queue exceeds the queue length that is defined by the Queue length
The queuing algorithm is triggered by the heartbeat timer, which is set through the Poll timer
length .
If the queue is not full:
Stamps this request with the current time.
Puts this request into the queue.
If the queue is full:
Checks whether there are requests whose integrate priorities are lower than that of
the priority of the new request. If there is, delete the low priority request, put the new
service in the queue. (Otherwise, the queuing algorithm rejects the new request
directly.)
Stamps the new request with the current time and then puts it into the queue.
After the heartbeat timer (Poll timer length) expires, the queuing algorithm proceeds as follows:
Selects the request with the highest integrate priority for an attempt of resource
allocation .
If the attempt fails, the queuing algorithm proceeds as follows:
Puts the service request back into the queue with the time stamp
unchanged for the next attempt.
Chooses the request with the greatest weight from the rest and makes
another attempt until a request is accepted or all requests are rejected.
Key parameters
z
Queue algorithm switch
Parameter ID: QUEUEALGOSWITCH
Queue length
Parameter ID: QUEUELEN
Queue algorithm switch

Parameter ID: QUEUEALGOSWITCH
Content: This parameter specifies whether to support the queuing function.
Queue length
Parameter ID: QUEUELEN
Content: This parameter defines the length of a queue.
Key parameters
z
Poll timer length
Parameter ID: POLLTIMERLEN
Max queuing time length
Parameter ID: MAXQUEUETIMELEN
Poll timer length

Parameter ID: POLLTIMERLEN
Value range: 1 to 6000 , step: 10ms
Content: This parameter defines the length of the heartbeat timer. Each time the timer
expires, the RNC chooses the service that meets the requirement to make an
admission attempt .
Max queuing time length
Parameter ID: MAXQUEUETIMELEN
Value range: 1 to 60s
Content: This parameter defines the maximum time that the service request can be in
the queue.
Contents
Load%
LCC (Load Congestion Control)

100%
Overload state: OLC will be
section A
THOLC
used
1
section B
THLDR
Basic congestion state: LDR

will be used
section C
Normal state: Permit entry
Times
LCC (Load Congestion Control) consist of LDR (Load Reshuffling) and OLC (Over Load
Control).
In basic congestion state, LDR will be used to optimize resource distribution, the main
rules is not to affect the feeling of users as possible as we can.
In overload state, OLC will be used to release overload state quickly, keep system stability
and the service of high priority users.
Load Reshuffling
z
Reasons
When the cell is in basic congestion state, new coming calls

could be easily rejected by system
Purpose
Optimizing cell resource distribution
Decreasing load level, increasing admission successful rate
When the usage of cell resource exceeds the basic congestion triggering threshold, the
cell enters the basic congestion state. In this case, LDR is required to reduce the cell load
and increase the access success rate.
Load Reshuffling
z
Triggering of LDR
Power resources
Code resource
Iub resources
NodeB Credit resource
For power resource, the RNC performs periodic measurement and checks whether the
cells are congested. For code, Iub, and NodeB credit resources, event-triggered congestion
applies, that is, the RNC checks whether the cells are congested when resource usage
changes.
Load Reshuffling
z
LDR Actions:
Inter-frequency load handover
Code reshuffling
BE service rate reduction
AMR rate reduction
Inter-RAT load handover in the CS domain
Inter-RAT load handover in the PS domain
Real time service Iu QoS renegotiation
MBMS power reduction
When the cell is in basic congestion state, the RNC takes one of the actions in each
period until the congestion is resolved
Load Reshuffling Actions triggered by different resources
If the downlink power admission uses the equivalent user number algorithm, basic congestion can also be
triggered by the equivalent number of users. In this situation, LDR actions do not involve AMR rate
reduction or MBMS power reduction, as indicated by the symbol "*" in above table
Congestion of different resource may trigger different actions.
For example, Credit congestion do not trigger Inter-Frequency Load Handover, AMR Rate
Reduction, and Code Reshuffling
When congestion of all resources is triggered, the action to be taken is based on the resource priority
configuration.
Key parameters
z
Parameter ID: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH
UL_UU_LDR
DL_UU_LDR
CELL_CODE_LDR
NodeB LDC algorithm switch
Parameter ID: NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch
IUB_LDR
NODEB_CREDIT_LDR

Content: If ULLDR, DLLDR, CELL_CODE_LDR are selected, the corresponding
algorithms are enabled. .
NodeB LDC algorithm switch
Parameter ID: NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch
Content: If IUB_LDR, NODEB_CREDIT_LDR, are selected, the corresponding
algorithms will be enabled; otherwise, disabled. .
Set this parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA / MOD NODEBALGOPARA /
SET LDCALGOPARA
Key parameters
z
UL (RTWP) LDR trigger threshold
Parameter ID: ULLDRTRIGTHD
UL (RTWP) LDR release threshold
Parameter ID: ULLDRRELTHD
UL LDR trigger threshold

Parameter ID: ULLDRTRIGTHD
Value range: 0 to 100 , %
Content: If the UL load of the cell is not lower than this threshold, the UL load
reshuffling function of the cell is triggered.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDM/MOD CELLLDM
UL LDR release threshold
Parameter ID: ULLDRRELTHD
Content: If the UL load of the cell is lower than this threshold, the UL load reshuffling
function of the cell is stopped.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDM / MOD CELLLDM
Key parameters
z
DL (TX POWER) LDR trigger threshold
Parameter ID: DLLDRTRIGTHD
DL (TX POWER) LDR release threshold
Parameter ID: DLLDRRELTHD
DL LDR trigger threshold

Parameter ID: DLLDRTRIGTHD
Content: If the DL load of the cell is not lower than this threshold, the DL load
reshuffling function of the cell is triggered.
DL LDR release threshold
Parameter ID: DLLDRRELTHD
Content: If the DL load of the cell is lower than this threshold, the DL load reshuffling
function of the cell is stopped.
Key parameters
z
Cell LDR SF reserved threshold
Parameter ID: CELLLDRSFRESTHD
Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold
Parameter ID: ULLDRCREDITSFRESTHD
Dl LDR Credit SF reserved threshold
Parameter ID: DLLDRCREDITSFRESTHD
Cell LDR SF reserved threshold

Parameter ID: CELLLDRSFRESTHD
Value range: SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256
Content: If the SF corresponding to the current remaining code of the cell is higher than
the threshold defined by this parameter, code congestion is triggered and the related
handling actions are taken.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDR / MOD CELLLDR
Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold
Parameter ID: ULLDRCREDITSFRESTHD
Content: If the SF corresponding to the current UL remaining credit resource is higher
than the threshold defined by this parameter, the UL credit LDR can be performed and
the related handling actions are taken.
Set this parameter through ADD NODEBLDR/MOD NODEBLDR
Dl LDR Credit SF reserved threshold
Parameter ID: DLLDRCREDITSFRESTHD
Content: If the value of SF corresponding to the current DL remaining credit resource is
higher than the threshold defined by this parameter, the DL credit LDR can be
performed and the related handling actions are taken.
Set this parameter through ADD NODEBLDR/MOD NODEBLDR
Key parameters
z
The First / Second/ Third/ Fourth priority for load reshuffling
Parameter ID:
LdrFirstPri
LdrSecondPri
LdrThirdPri
LdrFourthPri
The default configuration is :
IUBLDR > CREDITLDR > CODELDR > UULDR
The First / Second/ Third/ Fourth priority for load reshuffling

Parameter ID: LdrFirstPri / LdrSecondPri / LdrThirdPri / LdrFourthPri
Value range: IUBLDR(Iub load reshuffling), CREDITLDR(Credit load reshuffling),
CODELDR (Code load reshuffling), UULDR (Uu load reshuffling)
Content: These parameters specify the triggering resource order when congestion of all
resources are triggered.
The default configuration is IUBLDR > CREDITLDR > CODELDR > UULDR
Set this parameter through SET LDCALGOPARA
LDR procedure
Turn on LDR algorithm switch
Mark "current LDR state = uncongested"

Start LDM congestion indication report
Mark "current action
= first LDR action"
Clear "selected" mark of all UE LDR actions

Congestion
state indication
Wait for congestion indication
Current LDR state = congested?
Inter-freq
load handover
Succeed?
N
Code
reshuffling
Succeed?
N
BE rate
reduction
Succeed?
N
Sequence of
actions can be
configured
(current action
is taken firstly)
Inter-system
handover
in CS domain
Inter-system
handover
in PS domain
Succeed?
N
Succeed?
Mark
"current action
= successful
action"
AMR rate
reduction
Succeed?
N
QoS renogiation
on Iu interface
Succeed?
N
Y
MBMS power
reduction
Succeed?
N
No related action can be found

Mark "current action
= first LDR action"
Wait time
for LDR
action duration
Key parameters
z
LDR period timer length
Parameter ID: LDRPERIODTIMERLE
Gold User Load Control Switch
Parameter ID: GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
LDR period timer length

Parameter ID: LDRPERIODTIMERLE
Value range: 0 to 86400 s
Content: This parameter specifies the period of load reshuffling .
Gold User Load Control Switch
Parameter ID: GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
Content: This parameter specifies whether LDR actions are applicable to users of gold
priority.
Key parameters
z
DL LDR first / second / third / fourth / fifth / sixth / seventh /

eighth / ninth / tenth action
Parameter ID:
DlLdrFirstAction / DlLdrSecondAction / DlLdrThirdAction /

DlLdrFourthAction / DlLdrFifthAction / DlLdrSixthAction /
DlLdrSeventhAction / DlLdrEighthAction / DlLdrNinthAction /
DlLdrTenthAction
The default configuration is :
1st:CODEADJ , 2nd: INTERFREQLDHO , 3rd: BERATERED
DL LDR first / second / third / fourth / fifth / sixth / seventh / eighth / ninth / tenth action
Parameter ID: DlLdrFirstAction / DlLdrSecondAction / DlLdrThirdAction /
DlLdrFourthAction / DlLdrFifthAction / DlLdrSixthAction / DlLdrSeventhAction /
DlLdrEighthAction / DlLdrNinthAction / DlLdrTenthAction
Value range: NOACT (NO ACTION), INTERFREQLDHO (INTER-FREQ LOAD
HANDOVER), BERATERED (BE TRAFF RATE REDUCTION), QOSRENEGO
(UNCONTROLLED REAL-TIME TRAFF QOS RE-NEGOTIATION),
CSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO (CS DOMAIN INTER-RAT SHOULD BE LOAD
HANDOVER), PSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO (PS DOMAIN INTER-RAT SHOULD
BE LOAD HANDOVER), AMRRATERED (AMR TRAFF RATE REDUCTION),
MBMSDECPOWER(MBMS DESCEND POWER), CODEADJ(CODE ADJUST),
CSINTERRATSHOULDNOTLDHO (CS DOMAIN INTER-RAT SHOULD NOT BE
LOAD HANDOVER), PSINTERRATSHOULDNOTLDHO (PS DOMAIN INTER-RAT
SHOULD NOT BE LOAD HANDOVER).
Content: These parameters specify the LDR action order.
The default configuration is 1st:CODEADJ , 2nd: INTERFREQLDHO , 3rd:
BERATERED ,
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDR / MOD CELLLDR / ADD NODEBLDR /
MOD NODEBLDR
LDR Actions
z
Inter-frequency load handover
Target users
Based on user integrate priority

Current bandwidth for DCH or GBR bandwidth for HSPA has to be less
than the UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover maximum bandwidth
parameter
Target cells
Load difference between current load and the basic congestion trigger
threshold of target cell is larger than UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover
load space threshold
It is implemented as follows:
1. The LDR check whether the existing cell has a target cell of inter-frequency blind handover. If there is no
such a target cell, the action fails, and the LDR performs the next action.
2. The principles of selecting inter-freq handover target cell are different as a result of the different resources
which trigger the basic congestion.
1. If the basic congestion is triggered by the power resource:
The LDR checks whether the load difference between the current load and the basic congestion triggering
threshold of each target cell for blink handover is larger than the UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover load
space threshold (both the uplink and downlink conditions must be fulfilled). The other resources (code
resource, Iub bandwidth, and NodeB credit resource) in the target cell do not trigger basic congestion.
If the difference is not larger than the threshold, the action fails, and the LDR takes the next action.
If there are more than one cell meeting the requirements, the first one is selected as the blind handover
target cell.
2. If the basic congestion is triggered by the code resource:
Weather there are blind handover target cells meeting the requirements is decided by the following
conditions:
The minimum SF of the target cell is not greater than that of current cell.
The difference of code occupy rate between current cell and the target cell is greater than InterFreq HO
code used ratio space threshold.
The state of target cell is normal.
If there is no such cell, this action fails and the LDR performs the next action. If there are more than one cell
meeting the requirements, the first cell is selected as the blind handover target cell.
3. If the LDR finds out a target cell that meets the specified blind handover conditions, the LDR selects one UE
to make an inter-frequency blind handover, depending on the UEs ARP and occupied bandwidth. For the
selected UE other than a gold user, its UL/DL current bandwidth for DCH, GBR bandwidth for HSPA, shall be
less than and have the least difference from the UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover maximum bandwidth
parameter (Both the uplink and downlink condition must be fulfilled). If the LDR cannot find such a UE, the
action fails. The LDR performs the next action.
Key parameters
z
UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover load space threshold
Parameter ID: UL/DLINTERFREQHOCELLLOADSPACETHD
InterFreq HO code used ratio space threshold
Parameter ID: LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd
UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover maximum bandwidth
Parameter ID: UL/DLINTERFREQHOBWTHD
UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover load space threshold

Parameter ID: UL/DLINTERFREQHOCELLLOADSPACETHD
Content: The target cell can be a cell for inter-frequency blind handover only when the
UL/DL load space is higher than the threshold.
The UL/DL load space is the difference between the UL/DL basic congestion triggering
threshold and the current UL/DL load of a target cell for blind handover. .
InterFreq HO code used ratio space threshold
Parameter ID: LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd
Value range: 0% to 100% (0~1) ,step:1%
Content: The target cell can be used for inter-frequency blind handover only when the
DL Code used ratio space is higher than the threshold. The DL Code used ratio space
is the difference of code used ratio between the source cell and the target cell.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLLDR / LST CELLLDR / MOD CELLLDR
UL/DL Inter-freq cell load handover maximum bandwidth
Parameter ID: UL/DLINTERFREQHOBWTHD
Value range: 0 to 400000 bps
Content: During the inter-frequency load handover, the UE is selected as the target of
inter-frequency load handover from the UE set where the bandwidth is less than this
threshold.
LDR Actions
z
BE Rate Reduction
Target RABs
Based on RAB integrate priority
The data rate of BE service is larger than GBR
Number of RABs to be selected is configurable
BE rate reduction is implemented by reconfiguring the bandwidth. Bandwidth

reconfiguration requires signaling interaction on the Uu interface.
The LDR algorithm is implemented as follows:
1. Based on the integrate priority, the LDR sorts the RABs into a descending order. The
top RABs related to the BE services (whose current rate is higher than its GBR
configured by SET USERGBR command) are selected. If the integrate priorities of
some RABs are identical, the RAB with the highest rate is selected. The number of
RABs to select is determined by the UL/DL LDR-BE rate reduction RAB number
parameter.
2. The bandwidth of the selected services is reduced to the specified rate.
3. If services can be selected, the action is successful. If services cannot be selected, the
action fails. The LDR takes the next action.
4. The reconfiguration is completed as indicated by the RB RECONFIGURATION
message on the Uu interface and through the RL RECONFIGURATION message on
the Iub interface.
5. The BE rate reduction algorithm is controlled by the DCCC algorithm switch. BE rate
reduction can be performed only when the DCCC algorithm is enabled.
Key parameters
z
UL /DL LDR-BE rate reduction RAB number
Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
UL /DL LDR-BE rate reduction RAB number

Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
Content: These parameters specify the number of RABs to select in a UL/DL LDR BE
rate reduction.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for BE rate reduction is smaller than the
value of this parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are selected.
LDR Actions
z
Uncontrolled Real-time service QoS Renegotiation
Target RABs
Real-time services in the PS domain
The load is reduced by adjusting the rate of the real-time services through uncontrolled realtime OoS renegotiation.
Upon receipt of the message, the CN sends the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message
to the RNC for RAB parameter reconfiguration. Based on this function, the RNC can
adjust the rate of real-time services to reduce the load.
1. Based on the integrate priority, the LDR sorts the real-time services in the PS domain in
descending order. The top services are selected for QoS renegotiation.
2. The LDR performs QoS renegotiation for the selected services. The GBR during
service setup is the rate of the service after QoS renegotiation.
3. The RNC initiates the RAB Modification Request message to the CN for QoS
renegotiation.
4. If the RNC cannot find a proper service for QoS renegotiation, the action fails. The LDR
performs the next action.
Key parameters
z
UL / DL LDR un-ctrl RT Qos re-nego RAB num
Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
UL / DL LDR un-ctrl RT Qos re-nego RAB num

Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
Content: These parameters specify the number of RABs to select in a UL/DL LDR
uncontrolled real-time QoS renegotiation.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for uncontrolled real-time QoS renegotiation
is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are
selected.
LDR Actions
z
Inter-system Handover In the CS/PS Domain
Target user
Based on the user integrate priority
Handover Indicator
Handover to GSM should be performed
"handover to GSM should not be performed"
GSM cell
WCDMA cell
The 2G and 3G systems have different cell sizes and coverage modes. Therefore, blind
handover across systems is not taken into account.
The LDR is implemented in the downlink (e.g.) as follows:
1. Based on the integrate priority, the LDR sorts the UEs in descending order. The top
CS/PS services are selected.
2. For the selected UEs, the LDR sends the load handover command to the inter-system
handover module to ask the UEs to hand over to the 2G system.
3. The handover module decides to trigger inter-system handover, depending on the
capability of the UE and the capability of the algorithm switch to support the
compression mode.
4. This action is successful if any load handover UE is found. Otherwise, this action fails.
Key parameters
z
UL / DL CS should be ho user number
Parameter ID: UL/DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
UL / DL CS should not be ho user number
Parameter ID: UL/DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUENUM
UL / DL CS should be ho user number

Parameter ID: UL/DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
Content: These parameters specify the number of users to select in a UL/DL Inter-RAT
Should Be Load Handover in the CS Domain.
If the number of users that fulfil the criteria for Inter-RAT Should Be Load Handover in the
CS Domain is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the users that fulfil the
criteria are selected.
UL / DL CS should not be ho user number
Parameter ID: UL/DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUENUM
Should Not Be Load Handover in the CS Domain.
If the number of users that fulfil the criteria for Inter-RAT Should Not Be Load Handover
in the CS Domain is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the users that fulfil
the criteria are selected.
Key parameters
z
UL / DL PS should be ho user number
Parameter ID: UL/DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
UL / DL PS should not be ho user number
Parameter ID: UL/DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUENUM
UL / DL PS should be ho user number

Parameter ID: UL/DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
Should Be Load Handover in the PS Domain.
If the number of users that fulfil the criteria for Inter-RAT Should Be Load Handover in
the PS Domain is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the users that fulfil
UL / DL PS should not be ho user number
Parameter ID: UL/DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUENUM
Should Not Be Load Handover in the PS Domain.
If the number of users that fulfil the criteria for Inter-RAT Should Not Be Load Handover
in the PS Domain is smaller than the value of this parameter, then all the users that fulfil
LDR Actions
z
AMR Rate Reduction
Target user
AMR services and with the bit rate higher than the GBR
In the WCDMA system, voice services work in eight AMR modes. Each mode has its own
rate. Therefore, mode control is functionally equal to rate control.
1. Based on the integrate priority, the LDR sorts the RABs in the descending order. The top
UEs accessing the AMR services (conversational) and with the bit rate higher than the
GBR are selected.
2. In uplink, the RNC sends the Rate Control request message through the Iu-UP to the
CN to adjust the AMR rate to the GBR.
3. In downlink, The RNC sends the TFC CONTROL command to the UE to adjust the AMR
rate to the assured rate.
4. If the RNC cannot find a proper service for AMR rate reduction, the action fails. The LDR
performs the next action.
Key parameters
z
UL/DL LDR-AMR rate reduction RAB number
Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
UL/DL LDR-AMR rate reduction RAB number

Parameter ID: UL/DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
Content: These parameters specify the number of RABs to select in a UL/DL LDR AMR
rate reduction.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for AMR rate reduction is smaller than the
value of this parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are selected.
LDR Actions
Code Reshuffling
Reallocate code resources for candidate user
Code Adjustment
The algorithm operates as follows:

1,Initialize the SF_Cur of the root node of subtrees to Cell LDR SF reserved threshold.
2,Traverse all the subtrees with this SF_Cur at the root node. Leaving the subtrees
occupied by common channels and HSDPA channels out of account, take the
subtrees in which the number of users is not larger than the value of the Max user
number of code adjust parameter as candidates for code reshuffling.
3,Select a subtree from the candidates according to the setting of the LDR code priority
indicator parameter.
z
If this parameter is set to TRUE, select the subtree with the largest code
number from the candidates.
If this parameter is set to FALSE, select the subtree with the smallest
number of users from the candidates. In the case that multiple subtrees have
the same number of users, select the subtree with the largest code number.
4,Treat each user in the subtree as a new user and allocate code resources to each user.
5,Initiate the reconfiguration procedure for each user in the subtree and reconfigure the
channel codes of the users to the newly allocated code resources.
The reconfiguration procedure on the air interface is implemented through the PHYSICAL
CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION message and that on the Iub interface through the
RL RECONFIGURATION message.
Key parameters
z
Max user number of code adjust
Parameter ID: MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ
LDR code priority indicator
Parameter ID: LdrCodePriUseInd
The default value of this parameter is TRUE
Max user number of code adjust

Parameter ID: MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ
Value range: 1 to 3
Content: This parameter specifies the maximum number of users that can be selected
whenever code reshuffling is performed.
LDR code priority indicator
Parameter ID: LdrCodePriUseInd
Value range: True, False
Content: This parameter specifies whether to select preferentially the subtree with a
relatively large code number during subtree selection.
LDR Actions
z
MBMS Power Reduction
Purpose
The downlink power load can be reduced by lowering power on

MBMS traffic channels

1. Select all RABs with low priorities.
2. The RNC initiates the reconfiguration procedure and resets the transmit power of
MTCH (FACH) to the minimum value. The transmit power corresponds to the MBMS
service.
3. The reconfiguration procedure on the Iub interface is implemented through the
COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message.
Contents
Over Load Control

z
Reasons
In overload state, system is not stable
Purpose
Ensuring the system stability and making the system back to

the normal state as soon as possible
Triggering of Over Load
Power resource
After the UE access is granted, the power consumed by a single link is adjusted by the
single link power control algorithm. The power varies with the mobility of the UE and the
changes in the environment and the source rate. In some situations, the total power load of
the cell may be higher than the target load. To ensure system stability, overload congestion
must be handled.
Over Load Control

z
Over Load triggering
If the current UL/DL load of an R99 cell is not lower than the UL/DL OLC Trigger
threshold for some hysteresis (defined by the DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold in
DL; not configurable in UL), the cell works in overload congestion state and the related
overload handling action is taken. If the current UL/DL load of the R99 cell is lower than the
UL/DL OLC Release threshold for some hysteresis (defined by the DL State Trans
Hysteresis threshold in DL; not configurable in UL), the cell comes back to the normal
state.
The HSPA cell has the same uplink decision criterion as the R99 cell. The load in the
downlink, however, is the sum of load of the non-HSPA power (transmitted carrier power of
all codes not used for HS-PDSCH or HS-SCCH transmission) and the GBP..
Key parameters
z
UL_UU_OLC, DL_UU_OLC
UL/DL OLC trigger threshold
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCTRIGTHD
UL/DL OLC release threshold
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCRELTHD

Content: This parameter specifies the switch of UL/DL OLC.
UL_UU_OLC: UL overload control algorithm
DL_UU_OLC: DL overload control algorithm
UL/DL OLC trigger threshold
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCTRIGTHD
Content: If the UL load of the cell is not lower than the value of the UL OLC trigger
threshold, the UL overload congestion control of the cell is activated.
If the DL load of the cell is not lower than the value of the DL OLC trigger threshold,
the DL overload congestion control of the cell is activated.
UL/DL OLC release threshold
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCRELTHD
Content: If the UL load of the cell is lower than the value of the UL OLC release
threshold, the UL overload congestion control of the cell is deactivated.
If the DL load of the cell is lower than the value of the DL OLC release threshold, the
DL overload congestion control of the cell is deactivated.
The general OLC procedure covers the following actions: TF control of BE services, channel
switching of BE services, and release of RABs. The RNC takes periodical actions if overload
congestion is detected.
When the cell is overloaded, the RNC takes one of the following actions in each period (defined by
the OLC period timer length parameter, e.g.3s) until the congestion is resolved:
1. TF control of BE service (only for DCH BE service)
2. Switching BE services to common channel
3. Choosing and releasing the RABs (for HSPA or DCH service)
If the first action fails or the first action is completed but the cell is still in congestion, then the
second action is taken.
Key parameters
z
OLC period timer length
Parameter ID: OLCPERIODTIMERLEN
The default value of this parameter is 3000 (ms)
OLC period timer length

Parameter ID: OLCPERIODTIMERLEN
Content: This parameter specifies the period of overload control.
OLC Action
z
TF Control
Target user
The RABs with the DCH BE services
Execution
The RNC sends the TF control indication message to the MAC.
MAC restricts the TFC selection :

TFmax(N+1) = TFmax(N) x Ratelimitcoeff
Based on the RAB integrate priority, the OLC sorts the RABs into a descending order.The
following RABs are selected:
1. The RABs with the DCH BE services
2. The RABs with the lowest integrate priority.
3. The number of RABs selected is DL/UL OLC fast TF restrict RAB number.
The RNC sends the TF control indication message to the MAC. Each MAC of selected
RABs will receive one TF control indication message and will restrict the TFC selection
of the BE services to reduce the data rate step by step.
MAC restricts the TFC selection in a way like that the maximum TB number is calculated
with the formula:
TFmax(N+1) = TFmax(N) x Ratelimitcoeff
Ratelimitcoeff is a configurable parameter (DL OLC fast TF restrict data rate restrict
coefficient).
If the RNC cannot find an appropriate service for the TF control or the time for performing
the TF control exceed the DL OLC fast TF restrict times parameter, the action fails.
The OLC performs the next action.
If the congestion is released, the RNC sends the congestion release indication to the MAC.
At the same time, the rate recovery timer (whose length is defined by DL OLC fast TF
restrict data rate recover timer length) is started. When this timer is expired, the
MAC increases the data rate step by step.
MAC recovers the TFC selection by calculating the maximum TB number with the formula:
TFmax(N+1) = TFmax(N) x RateRecoverCoeff
RateRecoverCoeff is a configurable parameter (DL TF rate recover coefficient)
OLC Action
z
TF Control example
Before point A, the cell is not in OLC state. The downlink data transfer rate is 384 kbit/s, the
corresponding TF is 12 x 336, and TFS is {12 x 336, 8 x 336, 4 x 336, 2 x 336, 1 x 336,
0 x 336}.336 is the TB size, 320 payload + 16 MAC head
At point A, the cell enters OLC state. The RNC selects this RAB to do fast TF restriction.
MAC restricts the TFC selection during time between point A and point B by calculating
the maximum TB number as follows:
TFmax(1) = TFmax(0) x Ratelimitcoeff = 12 x 0.68 = 8.16
Match 8.16 and the TFS. Therefore, the maximum TB number is 8.
At point B, MAC performs further TFC restriction by calculating maximum TB number as
follows:
TFmax(2) = TFmax(1) x Ratelimitcoeff = 8 x 0.68 = 5.44
Match 5.44 and the TFS. Then, the maximum TB number is 4.
At point C and point D, similar process is followed.
Key parameters
z
UL/DL OLC fast TF restrict RAB number
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCFTFRSTRCTRABNUM
UL/DL OLC fast TF restrict times
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTIMES
UL/DL OLC fast TF restrict RAB number

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCFTFRSTRCTRABNUM
Content: These parameters specify the maximum number of RABs selected in a fast
TF restriction of UL/DL OLC.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for TF control is smaller than the value of
this parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are selected.
Set this parameter through ADD CELLOLC / MOD CELLOLC
UL/DL OLC fast TF restrict times
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTIMES
Content: These parameters specify the times of UL/DL OLC fast TF restrictions that
are executed.
Key parameters
z
DL TF rate restrict coefficient
Parameter ID: RateRstrctCoef
DL TF rate restrict timer length
Parameter ID: RateRstrctTimerLen
DL TF rate restrict coefficient

Parameter ID: RateRstrctCoef
Content: This parameter specifies the data rate restriction coefficient in the fast TF
restriction. The smaller the parameter is, the more effective the TF restriction is. After
receiving the TF control indication, the MAC obtains the maximum TF format with the
formula TFmax' = TFmax x Ratelimitcoeff .
The default value of this parameter is 68 %
DL TF rate restrict timer length
Parameter ID: RateRstrctTimerLen
Value range: 1 to 65535 ms
Content: This parameter specifies the length of the data rate restriction timer in the fast
TF restriction. The smaller the value of this parameter is, the more effective the TF
restriction is.
The default value of this parameter is 3000 ms
Key parameters
z
DL TF rate recover timer length
Parameter ID: RateRecoverTimerLen
DL TF rate recover coefficient
Parameter ID: RecoverCoef
The default value of this parameter is 130 %
DL TF rate recover timer length

Parameter ID: RateRecoverTimerLen
Value range: 1 to 65535 ms
Content: This parameter specifies the length of the data rate recovery timer. The
smaller the value of this parameter is, the faster the BE traffic rate increases after the
congestion is resolved.
The default value of this parameter is 5000 ms
DL TF rate recover coefficient
Parameter ID: RecoverCoef
Content: This parameter specifies the data rate recovery coefficient in the fast TF
restriction. The larger the parameter is, the larger the TF recover effect. After receiving
congestion release indication, the MAC obtains the maximum TF format with the
formula TFmax' = TFmax x RateRecovercoeff.
OLC Action
z
Switching BE Services to Common Channel
Target user
Based on the user integrate priority
The users with the DCH or HSDPA BE services in PS
Execution
The RNC sends RB Reconfiguration message to UE
UE make a response by RB Reconfiguration Complete
The OLC algorithm for switching BE services to common channel operates as follows:
Based on the user integrate priority, the OLC sorts all UEs that only have PS services
including HSPA and DCH services (except UEs having also a streaming bearer) into a
descending order.
The top N UEs are selected. The number of selected UEs is equal to Transfer Common
Channel user number. If UEs cannot be selected, the action fails. The OLC performs the
next action.
The selected UEs are switched to common channel.
Key parameters
z
Transfer Common Channel User number
Parameter ID: TransCchUserNum
Transfer Common Channel User number

Parameter ID: TransCchUserNum
Content: This parameter specifies the transfer common channel user number
Set this parameter through ADD CELLOLC / LST CELLOLC / MOD CELLOLC
OLC Action
z
Release of Some RABs
Target user
Based on the RAB integrate priority
DCH services RAB
Execution
The RNC sends IU Release Request message to CN
The RNC sends RRC Connection Release message to UE
OLC Algorithm for the Release of Some RABs in the Uplink:

The OLC algorithm for the release of some RABs in the uplink operates as follows:
Based on the integrate priority, the OLC sorts all RABs including HSUPA and DCH services
into a descending order.
The top RABs selected. If the integrate priorities of some RABs are identical, the RAB with
higher rate (current rate for DCH RAB and GBR for HSUPA RAB) in the uplink is
selected. The number of selected RABs is equal to UL OLC traff release RAB number.
The selected RABs are released directly.
OLC Algorithm for the Release of Some RABs in the Downlink
The OLC algorithm for the release of some RABs in the downlink operates as follows:
Based on the integrate priority, the OLC sorts all RABs into a descending order.
The top-priority RABs are selected. If the integrate priorities of some RABs are identical,
the RAB with higher rate (current rate) The number of selected RABs is equal to DL
OLC traff release RAB number.
The selected RABs are directly released.
Key parameters
z
UL/DL OLC traff release RAB number
Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCTRAFFRELRABNUM
UL/DL OLC traff release RAB number

Parameter ID: UL/DLOLCTRAFFRELRABNUM
Content: Either parameter specifies the number of RABs released in a UL or DL OLC
release action.
If the number of RABs that fulfil the criteria for release is smaller than the value of this
parameter, then all the RABs that fulfil the criteria are selected.
Summary
PUC (Potential User Control)
LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)
CAC (Call Admission Control)
IAC (Intelligent Admission Control)
LDR (Load Reshuffling)
OLC (Overload Control)
Thank You
www.huawei.com

Wcdma Ran Planning and Optimization Features and Algorithms PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wcdma Ran Planning and Optimization Features and Algorithms PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WCDMA UE Behaviors

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

UE behaviors in idle mode include :

System information reception

Cell selection and reselection

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Cell selection and reselection

System information reception

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

UE does not have UTRAN carrier information

In order to find a suitable cell to stay, UE will scan all the

UE has UTRAN carrier information

UE will try whether the original cell is suitable to stay. If not, UE

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

The second occasion is very common.

Frame synchronization and

Primary Scrambling code

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Step 1: Slot synchronization

Step 2: Frame synchronization and code-group identification

Step 3: Primary Scrambling code identification:

UE shall maintain a list of allowed PLMN types. In the

The UE selects a PLMN from HPLMNs or VPLMNs.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

PLMN Selection (Cont.)

PLMN Selection in HPLMNs

Automatic PLMN Selection Mode

The UE selects an available and suitable PLMN from the whole

Manual PLMN Selection Mode

The order of manual selection is the same as that of automatic

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

The priority order for automatic PLMN selection mode

PLMNs contained in the "User Controlled PLMN

The PLMNs are arranged in

PLMNs contained in the "Operator Controlled

The PLMNs are arranged in

Other PLMN/access technology combinations with

The PLMNs are arranged in

Other PLMN/access technology combinations

The PLMNs are arranged in

Previously selected PLMN

The PLMN selected by the

PLMN Selection (Cont.)

PLMN Selection in VPLMNs

If a UE is in a VPLMN, it scans the user controlled PLMN

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Structure of System Information

System information is organized as a tree, including:

MIB (Master Information Block )

SIB (System Information Block )

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

System Information Block (SIB) contains actual system information. It consists of

SIB1: Contains the system information for NAS and the

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

SIB8: Contains the CPCH static information

SIB9: Contains the CPCH dynamic information

SIB12: Contains measurement controlling information in connecting mode

SIB13: Contains ANSI-41 system information

SIB14: Contains the information in TDD mode

SIB15: Contains the position service information

SIB17: Contains the configuration information for TDD